POWER MATE i-MODEL D/H (FUNCTION) Connection manual (Function) Page 1137

Connection manual (Function)

Page of 1173

/ 1173

CUST.

TITLE

DRAW.NO.

FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H

Skip function for High-speed response function

B-63173EN-1/01-40

Signals

Skip signal

SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4

<X0000#0, #1, #2, #7> or

<X1000#0, #1, #2, #7>,

SKIPP1 to SKIPP16

<G0266, G0267>

[Classification] Input signal

[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is,

the position where a skip signal turns to “1” in

a command program block containing “G31P_”

is stored in a custom macro variable, and the

move command of the block is terminated at

the same time.

Which of the four skip signals, SKIP, SKIP2 to

SKIP4, is applicable to blocks containing the P

commands can be determined by parameter

(No.6202 to 6205). The four skip signals can

correspond to the P commands on a one-to-one

basis. One skip signal can also be made

applicable to multiple P commands.

Conversely, multiple skip signals can be made

applicable to one P command.

The skip signals, SKIPP1 to SKIPP16, can

correspond to the P commands on a

one-to-one.

Signal SKIPP1 => Command P11, P111

Signal SKIPP2 => Command P12, P112

Signal SKIPP16=> Command P26, P126

[Operation] When a skip signal turns to “1”, the control unit

functions as described below.

･ When a block contains a G code from

(G31P_) for skip cutting, and the skip signal

is made applicable by parameter setting to

the command (in case of X address), the

control unit reads and stores the current

position of the specified axis at that time.

The control unit stops the axis, then cancels

the remaining distance that the block was

supposed to be moved.

･ The skip signal is monitored not for a rising

edge, but for its state. So, if a skip signal

continues to be “1”, a skip condition is

assumed to be satisfied immediately when

the ne t skip cutting is specified

FANUC LTD

5／9

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

SHEET

Contents Summary of POWER MATE i-MODEL D/H (FUNCTION) Connection manual (Function)

Page 1GE Fanuc Automation Computer Numerical Control Products Power Mate i-D/H Connection Manual (Function) B- 63173EN-1/01 June 1997
Page 2Warnings and notices for GFLE-003 this publication Warning In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters wh
Page 3B–63173EN–1/01 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, suppl
Page 4B–63173EN–1/01 PREFACE This manual describes all the NC functions required to enable machine tool builders to design their CNC machine tools. The following items are explained for each function. 1. General Describes feature of the function. Refer to Operator’s manual as requied. 2. Signals D
Page 5PREFACE B–63173EN–1/01 Signal description Relation of interface signals among the CNC, the PMC and the machine tool is shown below: [For Power Mate i–D (one–path control) and Power Mate i–H] G000– X000– CNC PMC Machine F000– Y000– tool [For Power Mate i–D (two–path control)] CNC G000– X000– Path 1 F
Page 6B–63173EN–1/01 PREFACE D Expression of signals One address accommodates eight signals. Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD Parameter description Parameters are classified by data type as follows : Dta type Valid data range Remarks Bit 0 or
Page 7PREFACE B–63173EN–1/01 D Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters Data No. Data (#0 to #7 indicates bit position) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC D Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type Data No. Data 1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis NOTE In an it
Page 8B–63173EN–1/01 PREFACE Related Manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL D and MODEL H of Power Mate i. In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*). Table 1 Related manuals Specification Manual name Number DESCRIPTIONS B–63172EN CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63173EN CONNECT
Page 9B–63173EN–1/01 Table of Contents DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1 1. AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . .
Page 10Table of Contents B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 3.1 JOG FEED/ STEP FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 3
Page 11B–63173EN–1/01 7.2 ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/ Deceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 7.2.2 Rap
Page 12Table of Contents B–63173EN–1/01 11.PROGRAM COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/ POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 13B–63173EN–1/01 16.TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 17.TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 17.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 14B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1 AXIS CONTROL 1
Page 151. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.1 CONTROLLED AXES General Power Mate i–D Item Specification No. of basic controlled axes 1–path 1 axis 2–path 1 axis per path Controlled axes expansion 1–path Max. 2 axes (total) 2–path Basic simultaneously 1–path 1 axis (2 axes when No. of controlled controlled axes
Page 16B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1011 Number of controlled axes NOTE After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then back on to enable the setting. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1 or 2 (Power Mate i–D) 1 to 8 (Power Mate i–H) This parameter specifies the maximum number of co
Page 171. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS 1.2.1 Name of Axes General Each axis that is controlled by the CNC (including those controlled by the PMC) must be named. Select and set names from among X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, and W (with parameter 1020). The same name cannot be assigned to more
Page 18B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.2 Increment System General The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input ) and least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command increment is the lea
Page 191. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Table 1.2.2 (c) Increment system IS–C (Power Mate i–D only) Least input increment Least command increment Metric mm 0.0001mm 0.0001mm s stem system inp t input 0.0001deg 0.0001deg machine inch 0.00001inch 0.0001mm inp t input 0.0001deg 0.0001deg Inch mm 0.0001mm 0.0000
Page 20B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1004 IPR ISC IPR ISA NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. [Data type] Bit ISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment are set. ISC ISA Least input increment and Symbol le
Page 211. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis General Bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter 1006 can be used to set each axis to a linear axis or rotation axis. When the roll over function is used, the values displayed for absolute coordinates are rounded by the shift amount per rotation, as
Page 22B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ROSx ROTx NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit axis ROTx, ROSx Setting linear or rotation axis. ROSx ROTx Meaning 0 0 Linear axis (1) Inch/metric
Page 231. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1) RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction 0 : In which the distance to the target is shorter. 1 : Specified by the sign of command v
Page 24B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach General These signals release the specified control axes from control. When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table), these signals are selected according to whether the attachments are mounted. When multiple rotary tables a
Page 251. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Controlled axis detach status signals MDTCH1 – MDTCH8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals notify the PMC that the corresponding axes have been released from control. These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed number of the
Page 26B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL NOTE If the servo motor for an axis is connected to a 2–axis or other multiaxis amplifier, releasing the axis from control causes servo alarm 401 (V ready off) to be output. This alarm can be disabled by this parameter. When the servo motor is disconnected from the CNC
Page 271. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis General The movement state of each axis can be output to the PMC. Signal Axis moving signals MV1 – MV8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate that a control axis is moving. The signals are
Page 28B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Axis moving direction signals MVD1 – MVD8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis. They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
Page 291. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.2.6 Mirror Image General Mirror image can be applied to each axis, either by signals or by parameters (setting input is acceptable). All movement directions are reversed during automatic operation along axes to which a mirror image is applied. X B A B’ Z 0 When MI1 s
Page 30B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases: a) During offset cancel; b) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the feed hold state. Mirror image check signal MMI1 – MMI8 [Classification] Output signal [Function]
Page 311. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0012 MIRx Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit axis MIRx Mirror image for each axis 0 : Mirror image is off. 1 : Mirror image is on. Caution CAUTION Even when the mirror image is applied, commands which do not actuate mirror im
Page 32B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.2.7 Follow–up General When position control is disabled for the controlled axes (when the servo is off, during emergency stop, or during a servo alarm), if the machine is moved, a positional error occurs. Follow–up is a function for changing the current position of t
Page 331. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.2.8 Servo Off (Mechanical Handle) General Place the controlled axes in the servo off state; that is, they stop the current to the servo motor, which disables position control. However, the position detection feature functions continuously, so the current position is
Page 34B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Caution CAUTION 1 In general, interlock is applied to an axis while the servo off signal for that axis is 1. 2 When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is turned off. The mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. Set the timing for the au
Page 351. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.2.9 Position Switch General Position switch signals can be output to the PMC while the machine coordinates along a controlled axes are within a specified ranges. Signal Position switch signal PSW01 – PSW10 [Classification] Output signal [Function] N
Page 36B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter D Setting the correspondence between the position switch signals and the controlled axes 6910 Axis corresponding to the first position switch 6911 Axis corresponding to the second position switch 6912 Axis corresponding to the third position switch 6913 Axis
Page 371. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 D Setting the machine coordinate ranges for which the position switch signals are output D Maximum operation range 6930 Maximum operation range of the first position switch 6931 Maximum operation range of the second position switch 6932 Maximum operation range of the t
Page 38B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL D Minimum operation range 6950 Minimum operation range of the first position switch 6951 Minimum operation range of the second position switch 6952 Minimum operation range of the third position switch 6953 Minimum operation range of the fourth position switch 6954 Mini
Page 391. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION 1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation (for Power Mate i–D) General If pitch error compensation data is specified, pitch errors of each axis can be compensated in detection unit per axis. Pitch error compensation data is set for each compensation
Page 40B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL · Interval of the pitch error compensation positions (for each axis): Parameter 3624 Procedure for displaying and setting the pitch error compensation data 1 Set the following parameters: ⋅ Number of the pitch error compensation position at the reference position (for
Page 411. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Explanations D Specifying the To assign the compensation positions for each axis, specify the positive compensation position direction or the negative direction in reference to the compensation position No. of the reference position. If the machine stroke exceeds the s
Page 42B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Therefore, set the parameters as follows: Parameter Setting value 3620 : Compensation number for the reference position 40 3621 : Smallest compensation position number 33 3622 : Largest compensation position number 56 3623 : Compensation magnification 1 3624 : Interval
Page 431. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 D For rotary axis ⋅Amount of movement per rotation: 360° ⋅ Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45° ⋅ No. of the compensation position of the reference position: 60 If the above is specified, the No. of the farthest compensation position in the negative
Page 44B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL The following is an example of compensation amounts. No 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Compensation value +1 –2 +1 +3 –1 –1 –3 +2 +1 Pitch error compensation value (absolute value) +4 +3 Reference position 68 +2 (60) +1 68 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 (60) 61
Page 451. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Number of the pitch error compensation position at extremely positive position 3622 for each axis NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Number [Valid data range] 0
Page 46B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The pitch error compensation positions are arranged with equally spaced.
Page 471. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Warning WARNING 1 Compensation value range Compensation values can be set within the range from –7 x compensation magnification (detection unit) to +7 x compensation magnification (detection unit). The compensation magnification can be set for each axis within the rang
Page 48B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.3.2 Backlash Compensation General D Backlash compensation Function for compensating for lost motion on the machine. Set a compensation value in parameter No. 1851, in detection units from 0 to 9999 pulses for each axis. Parameter 1851 Backlash compensating value for
Page 491. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.4 The servo interface of the Series 16 features the following: Digitally controlled AC servo motor SETTINGS RELATED Motor feedback with serial pulse coders TO SERVO– (1) Absolute pulse coder with a resolution of 1,000,000 pulses/rev CONTROLLED AXES (2) Absolute pulse
Page 50B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1800 CVR [Data type] Bit CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before position control ready signal PRDY comes ON 0 : A servo alarm is generated. 1 : A servo alarm is not generated. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 APCx APZ
Page 511. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 [Data type] Bit axis DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiplier Set value Detection multiplier m ltiplier DM3x DM2x DM1x 0 0 0 1/2 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 3/2 0 1 1 2 1 0 0 5/2 1 0 1 3 1 1 0 7/2 1 1 1 4 NOTE When the flexible feed gear is used, do not use these parameters. Set
Page 52B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) When command multiplier is 1 to 48 Set value = 2 command multiplier Valid data range: 2 to 96 NOTE When command multiplier is 1 to 48, the set value must be determined so that an integer can be set for command multiplier. 1821 Reference counter size for each axis
Page 531. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis. If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning devia
Page 54B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1850 Grid shift for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999 A grid shift is set for each axis. To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount set in this parameter. Up to the ma
Page 551. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.4.3 FSSB Setting Overview Connecting the CNC control section to servo amplifiers via a high–speed serial bus (FANUC Serial Servo Bus, or FSSB), which uses only one fiber optics cable, can significantly reduce the amount of cabling in machine tool electrical sections.
Page 56B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Slave In an FSSB–based system, a fiber optics cable is used to connect the CNC to servo amplifiers and pulse modules. These amplifiers and pulse modules are called slaves. The two–axis amplifier consists of two slaves, and the three–axis amplifier consists of three sla
Page 571. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 By manual setting 1, some of the following functions and values cannot be used, as described below. They should be used in automatic setting or manual setting 2. D No pulse module can be used; hence, no separate position detectors can be used. D No number can be skippe
Page 58B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Manual setting 2 If the following parameter is set, manual setting 2 can be used for each parameter axis setting. Bit 0 of parameter No. 1902 = 1 To perform manual setting 2, set parameter Nos. 1023, 1905, 1910 to 1919, 1936, and 1937. Refer to the Parameter Manual for
Page 591. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 FSSB display and setting procedure D Display The FSSB setting screen displays FSSB–based amplifier and axis information. This information can also be specified by the operator. 1. Press the SYSTEM function key. 2. To display [FSSB], press the next menu page key several
Page 60B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL D AMP . . . . amplifier type The amplifier type display consists of the letter A, which stands for “amplifier”, a number that indicates the placing of the amplifier, as counted from that nearest to the CNC, and a letter such as L (first axis) or M (second axis) indicat
Page 611. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 D AXIS . . . . controlled axis number This item is the placing of the NC controlled axis. D NAME . . . controlled axis name D AMP . . . . type of the amplifier connected to each axis D M1 . . . . . . connector number for pulse module 1 This item is the number of the co
Page 62B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL AMPLIFIER MAINTENANCE O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME EDITION TEST MEINTE–NO. 1 X 01A 970123 01 2 Y 01A 970123 01 3 Z 01A 970123 01 4 A 02B 970123 01 5 B 02B 970123 01 6 C 02B 970123 01 >_ MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ AMP ][ AXIS ][ MAINTE ][ ][ ] The amplifier maintenance scree
Page 631. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 When the power is switched on, values are read from the parameters and displayed on the screen. NOTE 1 For the parameters to be specified on the FSSB setting screen, do not attempt to enter values on the parameter screen using the MDI or a G10 command. Use only the FSS
Page 64B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL (2) Axis setting screen AXIS SETTING O1000 N00001 AXIS NAME AMP M1 M2 1–DSP CS TNDM 1 X A1–L 0 0 0 0 1 2 Y A1–M 1 0 1 0 0 3 Z A2–L 0 0 0 1 0 4 A A3–L 0 0 0 0 2 5 B A3–M 0 0 0 0 0 6 C A4–L 0 0 0 0 0 >_ MDI **** *** *** 13:11:56 [ SETING ][ ][ CANCEL ][ ][ INPUT ] On the
Page 651. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 D An invalid master/slave axis pair is specified for TNDM. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1902 ASE FMD [Data type] Bit FMD Specifies the FSSB setting mode. 0 : Automatic setting mode. (If the interrelationships between axes and amplifiers are specified on the FSSB s
Page 66B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL D For those axes for which an odd number is set for parameter No. 1023, the fast type must be used. D For those axes for which an even number is set for parameter No. 1023, only the slow type is usable; this bit must be set to 1. CNC Controlled Program Servo axis Inter
Page 671. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1910 Address conversion table value for slave 1 (ATR) 1911 Address conversion table value for slave 2 (ATR) 1912 Address conversion table value for slave 3 (ATR) 1913 Address conversion table value for slave 4 (ATR) 1914 Address conversion table value for slave 5 (ATR)
Page 68B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL f Example of axis configuration and parameter setting CNC Slave ATR Controlled Program Servo axis number No.1910 Axis axis axis name number to 1919 number (No. 1020) (No. 1023) Single–axis 1 0 1 X 1 amplifier X 2 Y 3 2 1 A Two–axis amplifier 3 Z 4 3 2 Y 4 A 2 Two–axis
Page 691. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1920 Controlled axis number for slave 1 (FSSB setting screen only) 1921 Controlled axis number for slave 2 (FSSB setting screen only) 1922 Controlled axis number for slave 3 (FSSB setting screen only) 1923 Controlled axis number for slave 4 (FSSB setting screen only) 1
Page 70B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1936 Connector number for first pulse module 1937 Connector number for second pulse module [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 To use a pulse module, this parameter must be set to “connection number for the pulse module,” minus 1; that is, 0 for connector n
Page 711. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Number Message Description 463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE The servo section failed to receive data DATA FAILED correctly because of an FSSB commu- nication error. 464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA An attempt to write maintenance in- FAILED formation to the amplifier maintenance scre
Page 72B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS 1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System General Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point proper to the machine system. A coordinate system in which the reference position becomes the parameter-preset (N
Page 731. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System General A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system). Setting a workpiece
Page 74B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a coordinate system automatically. 1251 Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is performed with inch input [Data type] Two–word axi
Page 751. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1.5.3 Rotary Axis Roll Over General The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter 1008 to 1. For an incremental command, the tool moves the angle specified in t
Page 76B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RRLx RABx ROAx NOTE After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take effect. [Data type] Bit axis ROAx The roll–over function of a rotation axis is 0 : Invalid 1 : Valid NOTE ROAx specifies the fu
Page 771. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.16.1 ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER (B–63174EN) 64
Page 78B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.6 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL General A movement along an axis can be executed simply by executing a move command specified for that axis or by synchronizing the movement with another axis. Either of these two types can be selected by means of a signal sent from the m
Page 791. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE If the synchronization error check function is not used, set parameter 8314 to 0. D Synchronization If the agreement between the positions of the master and slave axes is lost compensation function when the system power is turned off, the function compensates for
Page 80B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL one master/slave axis pair is in sync, it is necessary to use parameters ATEx (bit 0 of parameter No. 8303) and ATSx (bit 1 of parameter No. 8303). 1 Set bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 to 1. 2 Enter ZRN mode (or JOG mode for reference position setting without dogs),
Page 811. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 D Torque difference alarm If the master and slave axes operate independently while simple detection synchronous control is applied, the machine may be damaged. To prevent this, the torque command difference between the axes is monitored. If the difference is found to b
Page 82B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 4 Set parameter No. 2115 to 22160. 5 Connect a check board, and observe a signal at CH7 with the rotary switch on the check board set to 1. 6 Convert the observed value, using the formula 1 V = 410 (specified threshold value). Read the maximum value during ordinary ope
Page 831. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Signals for selecting the manual feed axis for simple synchronous control SYNCJ1 to SYNCJ8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] synchronous control is performed in jog, handle, or incremental feed mode. The signal is provided for each controlled axis. The nu
Page 84B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3105 SMF [Data type] Bit SMF During simple synchronous contorol, movement along a slave axis is: 0 : Included in the actual speed display 1 : Not included in the actual speed display NOTE This parameter is valid when simple syncronous
Page 851. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8303 SFX ASX AEX [Data type] Bit axis AEX Specify whether to enable the automatic setting of grid positioning under simple synchronous control (more than one master/slave axis pair) 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled ASX Specify whether to start the autom
Page 86B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 8311 Axis number of master axis in synchronous control [Data type] Byte axis [Valid data range] 0 to 7 Select a master axis and slave axis for simple synchronous control. Set a master axis number for the slave axis side. Example1: When using the first axis (X–axis) as
Page 871. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 8314 Allowable error in synchronization error check [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Metric machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Th
Page 88B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 8317 Torque difference alarm detection timer (one master/slave axis pair under synchro- nous control) [Data type] Word [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (if 0 is specified, the system assumes 512 ms.) This parameter specifies the time between the servo pre
Page 891. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 8327 Torque difference alarm detection timer [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 This parameter specifies the time between the servo preparation completed signal (SA [F000#6]) becoming 1 and the torque difference alarm detection functio
Page 90B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Servo alarm Number Message Description 407 SERVO ALARM: The difference in position error be- EXCESS ERROR tween the master and slave axes ex- ceeded the value set with the parame- ter 8314. 410 SERVO ALARM: The most likely causes are: n AXIS EXCESS ERR 1 For the n axis
Page 911. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Caution CAUTION 1 When a manual reference position return is executed, identical movements are performed along the master and slave axes until deceleration commences. Subsequently, grids are detected separately. 2 Pitch error compensation and backlash compensation are
Page 92B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL 1.7 TANDEM CONTROL General If a single motor cannot produce sufficient torque to move a large table, for example, this function allows two motors to be used. By means of this function, two motors can be used to perform movement along a single axis. Positioning is carri
Page 931. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 PC: Pulse coder Master Slave axis axis PC PC Power Power line line Servo Servo amplifier amplifier PWM PWM Rotor Rotor position position Current Current loop loop PRM. 2087 Speed FB PRM. 2087 Speed FB Preload (L) Preload (M) Re- Re- verse? verse? PRM. 2022 PRM.
Page 94B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Explanations D Axis configuration in To specify the axis configuration in tandem control, follow the procedure tandem control below: (1) Tandem control can be performed for up to four pairs of axes. (2) In terms of controlled axes, the pair of axes is handled as two se
Page 951. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 D Preload function By adding an offset to the torque controlled by the position (velocity) feedback device, the function can apply opposite torques to the master and slave axes so that equal and opposite movements are performed for both axes. This function can reduce t
Page 96B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL D Connection of axis The DI/DO signals, generally connected to each axis, must be connected signals only to the master axis of two axes of tandem control. The signals need not be connected to the slave axis. The following signals, however, may have to be connected depe
Page 971. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 The classifications of the parameters are described below. Any parameter that is not listed in the tables for the three classifications should be processed as a parameter of type i) and, specify identical values for the master and slave axes. WARNING Note that, if diff
Page 98B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Parameters that should be set to only the master Parameter No. Meaning of parameters axes 0012#0 Mirror image 0012#7 Servo control off 1004#7 Input unit 10 times 1005#7 Servo control off 1022 Parallel axis specification 1423 Jog feedrate 1424 Manual rapid traverse 1425
Page 991. AXIS CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1817 TAN [Data type] Bit axis (set to each axis) Set both master and slave axes. TAN Tandem control is 1 : ignored 0 : valid #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2008 VFBAVE [Data type] Bit axis (set to each axis) Set only to the master axes. VFBAVE Velocity
Page 100B–63173EN–1/01 1. AXIS CONTROL Alarm and message Number Message Description 417 SERVO ALARM: Illegal values are set for parameter 1010, n AXIS DGTL PARAM 1023, or 1817 when tandem control is per- formed. Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.16.3 Tandem control (B–63014EN) 87
Page 1012. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 88
Page 102B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.1 EMERGENCY STOP General If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. Red EMERGENCY STOP Fig. 2.1 (a) EMERGENCY STOP This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the mac
Page 1032. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Emergency stop limit switch Emergency stop +X =X +Y =Y +Z =Z +4 =4 Relay power Emergency stop temporary release supply EMG SK Spark killer Fig. 2.1 (b) Connection of emergency stop limit switch The distance from the position where the dynamic brake is app
Page 104B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 *ESP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X1000 *ESP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G008 *ESP Reference item FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series B–65142E DESCRIPTIONS 91
Page 1052. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.2 CNC READY SIGNAL General When the CNC is turned on and becomes ready for operation, the CNC ready signal is set to 1. Signal CNC Ready Signal MA [Classification] Output signal [Function] The CNC ready signal reports that the CNC is ready. [Out
Page 106B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 SA #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F001 MA 93
Page 1072. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK 2.3.1 Overtravel Signal General When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Signal Overtra
Page 108B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION The following shows the deceleration distance at overtravel. (i) Rapid traverse Command pulse deceleration V ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ Servo system delay ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄ VR t ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ *+L limit switch t1 t2 TR TR 1 L1=VR(t1+t2+ +TS) · [mm or inch] 2 60000 L1:Deceleratio
Page 1092. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 D Releasing overtravel Press the reset button to reset the alarm after moving the tool to the safety direction by manual operation. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G114 *+L8 *+L7 *+L6 *+L5 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1 G116 *–L8 *–L7 *–L6 *–L5 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2
Page 110B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 General When the tool tries to exceed a stored stroke check, an alarm is displayed and the tool is decelerated and stopped. When the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved in the reverse d
Page 1112. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G007 RLSOT G110 +LM8 +LM7 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1 G112 –LM8 –LM7 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 BFA LZR [Data type] Bit LZR Checking of stored stroke check 1 during the tim
Page 112B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION WARNING When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke becomes infinite: parameter 1320 < parameter 1321 For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set, only incremental commands are available. If an absolute command is issued for this a
Page 1132. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.4 ALARM SIGNAL General When an alarm is triggered in the CNC, the alarm is indicated on the screen, and the alarm signal is set to 1. If the voltage level of the memory backup battery falls to below a specified level while the CNC is turned off, the bat
Page 114B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F001 BAL AL Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 NPA [Data type] Bit NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator message is entered 0 : The display shifts to the alarm or message screen. 1 : The
Page 1152. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.5 INTERLOCK General This signal disables machine movement along axes. When this signal is input during movement along axes, the tool movement is decelerated, then stopped. Signal All axes Interlock signal *IT *RILK or [Classif
Page 116B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT or *RILK to “0” is represented by the following formula. 1 Tc Ts A Qmax =Fm × ( + + ) 60 1000 1000 1000 Where Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch) Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) Tc : Cutti
Page 1172. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Interlock signal for each axis and direction +MITn –MITn (n : 1 to 8) [Classification] Input signal [Function] This function allows a directional interlock for each axis. [Operation] When the axis/directional interlock signal b
Page 118B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.6 MODE SELECTION General The mode select signal is a code signal consisting of the three bits MD1, MD2, and MD4. The seven modes -- memory edit (EDIT), AUTO operation (AUTO), manual data input (MDI), manual handle/step feed (HANDLE/STEP), manual continu
Page 1192. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal status Mode MD4 MD2 MD1 DNCI ZRN 1 Memory edit (EDIT) 0 1 1 0 0 2 AUTO operation (AUTO) 0 0 1 0 0 3 Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0 0 0 4 Manual handle/step feed 1 0 0 0 0 (HANDLE/STEP) 5 Manual continuous feed (JOG) 1 0 1 0 0 6 TEACH IN HANDLE (THND
Page 120B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MSTP F004 MZRN Note NOTE Precautions on modes and mode switching 1 In the MDI mode, the STL signal turns to “0” and the CNC stops a
Page 1212. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE 5 During operation in automatic operation mode (AUTO, RMT, or MDI), specifying switching to another automatic operation mode (AUTO, RMT, or MDI) or memory editing mode (EDIT) first places the CNC in the automatic operation stop state after executing
Page 122B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 6 When the manual handle/step feed mode or TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE mode is selected while the CNC is operating in the AUTO, RMT, or MDI mode, the automatic or MDI operation stops, the STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”,
Page 1232. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE 7 When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE mode is selected during RMT, AUTO or MDI mode operation, operation stops, the STL signal turns to “0”, the SPL signal simultaneously turns to “1”, and the CNC enters the JOG or TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE mode. Jog feed
Page 124B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION NOTE 8 The mode switching operation is summarized in the time chart below (Fig. 2.6 (f)). M M M M D D D Disable because of Disable because of feed hold state of MDI operation possible here- feed hold state of automatic operation MDI operation after H / S
Page 1252. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.7 PATH SELECTION/ DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES (Power Mate i–D(TWO–PATH CONTROL)) General Path selection specifies whether operations performed using the CRT/MDI panel are for path 1 or path 2. The operations, as used here, include displaying and sett
Page 126B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G063 PATHS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F254 PATHO Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8100 RST [Data type] Bit RST Reset key on the CRT/MDI panel 0 : Effective for both paths 1 : Effective for the path selected by the path
Page 1272. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.8 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL General The table below lists the status output signals for notifying the state of the CNC. See the sections listed in the table for details of each signal. Signal name Symbol Reference section Alarm signal AL 2.4 Battery alarm si
Page 128B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F002 CUT 115
Page 1292. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.9 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL General The German VDE safety standard requires that the motor be deactivated when the safety guard is opened. By using the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal, however, the CNC can be restarted without resetting, even if the saf
Page 130B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G066 IGNVRY G192 IGVRY8 IGVRY7 IGVRY6 IGVRY5 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1804 SAK [Data type] Bit SAK When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal IGNVRY is 1, or when the VRDY OFF alarm ig
Page 1312. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.10 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION General Machine collision, defective, and damaged cutters cause a large load torque on the servo and spindle motors, compared with normal rapid traverse or cutting feed. This function detects a load torque on the motors and se
Page 132B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION D Parameter setting The following flowcharts explain how to specify parameters for the abnormal load detection function. (1) Servo axis Abnormal load detection function is available. Abnormal load detection No. 2016#0 = 0 function to be used? No Yes No. 2
Page 1332. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal Servo axis abnormal load detected signal ABTQSV [Classification] Output signal [Function] Informs the PMC that an abnormal load was detected on a servo axis. [Output condition] This signal becomes “1” if: S An abnormal load is detected for
Page 134B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION Parameter (1) Parameter common to servo axes and spindles 1880 Timer for abnormal load detection alarm [Data type] Word [Unit of data] msec [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 (If 0 is set, 200 ms is assumed.) This parameter specifies the interval between the d
Page 1352. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2051 Velocity control observer [Data type] Word axis [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 [Setting value] 3329 When using the velocity loop observer (by setting bit 2 of parameter No. 2003 to 1), set 510 in this parameter. 2103 Retraction distance upon the detec
Page 136B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION (3) Spindle parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 4015 SPLDMT [Data type] Bit axis SPLDMT Spindle load torque monitor function 0 : The spindle load torque monitor function is disabled. 1 : The spindle load torque monitor function is enabled. 4247 Magnetic fl
Page 1372. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 4341 Threshold for abnormal load detection alarm [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 0.01 % [Valid data range] 0 to 10000 This parameter specifies the threshold load torque at which an abnormal load detection alarm is issued for the spindle. Set a percen
Page 138B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION PMC window function D Reading the load torque The load torque data can be read at the PMC using its window function. data (1) Servo axis [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) (Not to be set) 4 (Data length) (Not to
Page 1392. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Top address + 0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) ? (Refer to the above description about the completion code.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 2*n, where n is the num- ber of specified axes) 6 (Data number) 0 8 (Data attribute) M (M: Data at input) Descript
Page 140B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION (2) Spindle [Input data structure] Top address +0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) (Not to be set) 4 (Data length) (Not to be set) 6 (Data number) 1 8 (Data attribute) 1 10 (Data area) (Not to be set) 42 [Completion code] 0: The load torque data wa
Page 1412. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 [Output data structure] Top address + 0 (Function code) 211 2 (Completion code) ? (Refer to the above description about the completion code.) 4 (Data length) L (L = 2*n, where n is the num- ber of specified axes) 6 (Data number) 1 8 (Data attribute) 1 Des
Page 142B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.11 ALARM CLASSIFICATION SIGNALS General These signals are used to identify alarms that occur in the Power Mate CNC. Signal P/S Alarm 100 signal ALPS1 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that P/S alarm 100 (PARAMETER
Page 1432. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 P/S Alarm signal ALPS [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that P/S alarm or custom macro alarm has occurred. [Output condition] The signal becomes 1 if: – P/S alarm (No.001 to 099, 102, 102 to 254) or cuctom macro alar
Page 144B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION APC alarm signal ALAPC [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that APC alarm has occurred. [Output condition] The signal becomes 1 if: – APC alarm occurs. The signal is 0 if: – APC alarm has not occurred. Spindle alarm si
Page 1452. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 2.12 APC ALARM CLASSIFICATION SIGNALS General These signals are used to identify APC alarms that occur in the Power Mate CNC. Signal APC communication error signal APCMn [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates th
Page 146B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION APC framing error signal APFEn [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that APC framing error (alarm 303) has occurred. APFE1 1 APC framing error of 1st axis 2 APC framing error of 2nd axis : : : : [Output condit
Page 1472. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 [Output condition] The signal becomes 1 if: – APC pulse miss error occurs. The signal is 0 if: – APC pulse miss error has not occurred. APC battery voltage 0 error signal APBZn [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indic
Page 148B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION APC battery low alarm 2 signal APBLn [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that APC battery low alarm 2 (alarm 308) has occurred. APBL1 1 APC battery low alarm 2 of 1st axis 2 APC battery low alarm 2 of 2nd axi
Page 1492. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Contents 301 APC alarm: nth–axis (n=1 – 8) APC communication er- nth–axis communica- ror. Failure in data transmission tion Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module. 302 APC alarm: nth–axis (n
Page 150B–63173EN–1/01 2. PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION 2.13 This signal indicates whether the current amount of positional deviation has exceeded the corresponding check value specified in parameter No. SERVO POSITION 1872. DEVIATION MONITOR SIGNAL General This signal indicates that the current amount of posi
Page 1513. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 3 MANUAL OPERATION 138
Page 152B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.1 JOG FEED/ STEP FEED General D Jog feed In the jog mode, turning a feed axis and direction selection signal to “1” on the machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. Usually, this continuous movement ca
Page 1533. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 The only difference between jog feed and step feed is the method of selecting the feed distance. In jog feed, the tool continues to be fed while the following signals selecting the feed axis and direction are “1”: +J1, –J1, +J2, –J2, +J3, –J3, etc. In step feed, th
Page 154B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual handle step feed mode (TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE mode) +J1 1st axis move NOTE 1 If both the positive direction and negative direction signals of the same axis are simultaneously set to “1”, neither the positive direction nor the negative direction is selected. Th
Page 1553. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 ȍ|2 15 1 Override value (%) = 0.01% Vi | i+0 where Vi = 0 when the *JVi signal is “1” Vi = 1 when the *JVi signal is “0” The override value is assumed to be zero when all of the signals, (*JV0 to *JV15) are set to “1” or “0”. When this occurs, the feed is stopped.
Page 156B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION Jog feed mode or manual handle step feed mode +J1 RT 1st axis move Rapid traverse rate Feedrate selected by manual feedrate override signal WARNING After the power is turned on, the stroke limit function does not work until the reference position return is complete
Page 1573. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RPD [Data type] Bit RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power–on time to the completion of the reference position return. 0 : Disabled (Jog feed is performed.) 1 : Enabled 1423 Feedrate in manual continuous feed (jog feed)
Page 158B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION 1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] 1 msec [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 (for ex
Page 1593. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED General In the manual handle feed mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator. Select the axis along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection signal. The minimum distance the tool is mo
Page 160B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION Signal Manual Handle Feed Axis Selection Signals HS1A – HS1D HS2A – HS2D HS3A – HS3D [Classification] Input signal [Function] Selects the axis of manual handle feed. A set of four code signals, A, B, C, and D is provided fo
Page 1613. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Manual Handle Feed Amount Selection Signal MP1, MP2 (Incremental Feed Signal) [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects the distance traveled per pulse from the manual pulse generator during the manual handle feed or manual handle inte
Page 162B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7100 HPF THD [Data type] Bit THD Manual pulse generator in TEACH IN JOG mode 0: Invalid 1: Valid HPF When a manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is issued, 0: The rate is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, and the
Page 1633. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 This parameter sets the magnification when manual handle feed movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are “1”. 7117 Allowable number of pulses that can be accumulated during manual handle feed [Data type] 2–word [Unit of data] Pulses [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999
Page 164B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPTION General Rotating the manual pulse generator during automatic operation can increase the distance traveled by the amount corresponding to the handle feed. The axis to which the handle interrupt is applied is selected using the manual h
Page 1653. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HS1IA G042 HS3ID HS3IC HS3IB HS3IA Warning WARNING The travel distance by handle interruption is determined according to the amount by which the manual pulse generator is turned a
Page 166B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.4 RETURN SIGNAL General If the jog feed (JOG) mode is selected, and a return signal (RTN1n, RTN2n, or RTN3n) is set to 1, rapid traverse occurs to the reference position specified by the return signal. If the signal becomes 0 during rapid traverse, axis movement
Page 1673. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G206 RTN18 RTN17 RTN16 RTN15 RTN14 RTN13 RTN12 RTN11 G207 RTN28 RTN27 RTN26 RTN25 RTN24 RTN23 RTN22 RTN21 G208 RTN38 RTN37 RTN36 RTN35 RTN34 RTN33 RTN32 RTN31 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZPI ZPR [Data type] Bit ZPR
Page 168B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate sys- 1250 tem setting is performed [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Input increment IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Linear axis (input in inches) 0.00
Page 1693. MANUAL OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1404 DLF [Data type] Bit DLF After a reference potition is set, manual reference position return performed at: 0 : Rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1420) 1 : Manual rapid traverse rate (parameter No.1424) NOTE This parameter selects a feedr
Page 170B–63173EN–1/01 3. MANUAL OPERATION Alarm and message Number Message Description 405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to (WRONG ZRN) an CNC or servo system fault in the reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position re- turn could not be executed correctly.
Page 1714. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 158
Page 172B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No. 1006) for each axis by turning the feed axis and direction select signal to “1” in the manual reference position return mode, an
Page 1734. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 (4) When the reference position is approached, a limit switch installed on the machine is turned on, making the deceleration signal (*DEC1, *DEC2, *DEC3,…) for reference position deceleration “0”. Consequently, the feedrate is decelerated to 0, then
Page 174B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Installation conditions When installing the deceleration limit switch for manual reference for deceleration limit position return, ensure that following conditions are satisfied: switch Deceleration limit Deceleration limit operation position releas
Page 1754. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 By reversing the formula above, the following formula gives the feedrate F needed to set the servo position error to 128 when the servo loop gain G is 30 s–1 and the detection unit U is 1 mm: 128 60 30 F= 1000 = 230 [mm/min] Therefore, when the
Page 176B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Manual reference position return selection check signal MZRN [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal reports that manual reference position return has been selected once. [Output condition] This signal turns to “1” when: ⋅ Man
Page 1774. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE When reference position return is selected, an axis whose reference position return end signal is already “1” or an axis whose reference position return end signal was set “1” upon completion of reference position return is locked, and movement
Page 178B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Reference position return end signals ZP1 to ZP8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report that the tool is at the refernce position on a controlled axis. These siganls are provided for axes in a one–to–one corespondence.
Page 1794. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 The signals are set to 0 in the following case: ⋅ When the reference position is lost Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G043 ZRN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F004 MZRN F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1 F120 ZRF8 ZRF7 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
Page 180B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1005 ZRNx [Data type] Bit axis ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28 is issued in automatic operation (AUTO, RMT, or MDI) when a return to the reference position has not been performed since the power was
Page 1814. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 [Unit of data] Increment system IS–A IS–B IS–C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 Set the coordinate values of the reference
Page 182B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1300 LZR [Data type] Bit LZR Checking of stored stroke limit 1 during the time from power–on to the manual reference position return 0 : The stroke limit 1 is checked. 1 : The stroke limit 1 is not checked 1425 FL rate of the
Page 1834. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible [Data type] Byte axis [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 127 This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return in manual reference positi
Page 184B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Alarm and message Number Message Description 090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot INCOMPLETE be performed normally because the ref- erence position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too sl
Page 1854. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 4.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS General This function moves the tool near around the reference position set for each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference position in the reference position return mode w
Page 186B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Manual reference position return mode +J1, –J1, or ZR1 Grid ZP1 ZRF1 Feedrate FL rate The following figure shows the positional relation between the reference position and the point to which the tool is positioned by manual continuous fe
Page 1874. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 JOG mode MD4, MD2, MD1 ZRN (Note1) +Jn/–Jn or ZRn +X +Jn/–Jn or ZRn ZRn (Note2) ZRn (Note2) FL FL FL Feedrate Position detector grid 1st reference position setting by method 1. ZPX 1st reference position Next reference position True reference positi
Page 188B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT D If jog feed mode is not selected, the control unit ignores the manual reference position return selection signal. D If jog mode is selected, manual reference position return is enabled. In this case, manual reference position return selection chec
Page 1894. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 – If a reference position has been set up The selected axis is positioned at the reference position, provided that reference position setting is possible. Reference position without dogs setting signal ZRn [Classification] Input signal [Funct
Page 190B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Reference position establishment signal ZRF1 to ZRF8 [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notify the system that the reference position has been established. A reference position establishment signal is provided for each axis. The number
Page 1914. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1002 DLZ JAX [Data type] Bit JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual continuous feed, manual rapid traverse and manual reference position return 0 : 1 axis 1 : 2 axes (3 axes for Power Mate i–H) DLZ F
Page 192B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of initial backlash at power–on 0 : Positive direction 1 : Negative direction #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1201 ZPI ZPR [Data type] Bit ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when th
Page 1934. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a coordinate system automatically. 1251 Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is p
Page 194B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT grid interval Size of the reference counter = detection unit Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder NOTE When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued. 1836 Servo error amo
Page 1954. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot INCOMPLETE be performed normally because the ref- erence position return start point is too close to the reference position or the speed is too sl
Page 196B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.3 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The G28 command positions the tool to the reference position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis, then sets the completion signal for reference position return (see Section 4.1) to 1.
Page 1974. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 405 SERVO ALARM: Position control system fault. Due to (WRONG ZRN) an CNC or servo system fault in the reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position re- turn could not be exe
Page 198B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.4 2ND OR 3RD REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General The G30 command positions the tool to the 2nd or 3rd reference position, via the specified intermediate point, along the specified axis. Then, it sets the completion signal for 2nd or 3rd reference po
Page 1994. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 These signals turn to “0” when: D The tool moved from the reference position. D An emergency stop is applied. D A servo alarm is raised. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F096 ZP28 ZP27 ZP26 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21 F098 ZP38 ZP37 ZP36 ZP35 ZP3
Page 200B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.6 REFERENCE POSITION (B–63174EN) 187
Page 2014. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 4.5 BUTT–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING General This function automates the procedure of butting the tool against a mechanical stopper on an axis to set a reference position. The purpose of this function is to eliminate the variations in reference
Page 202B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT (5) During the cycle operation, the automatic operation start signal OP is 1. Cycle operation When no reference position has been set (APZx, bit 4 of parameter No. 1815, is 0), operations (A) to (E), below, are performed automatically to set a refer
Page 2034. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 The tool moves in the direction specified with ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1006), at the feedrate specified with parameter No. 7184, at the torque specified with parameter No. 7186 (until the tool strikes the mechanical stopper). Mechanical stopper
Page 204B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Manual reference position return mode Manual handle feed axis select signals HS1A to HS1D Automatic operation start signal ST Cycle operation Automatic operation signal OP Reference position return end signals ZP1 to ZP8 N% Torque limit 100% 100% Bu
Page 2054. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F180 CLRCH8 CLRCH7 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1006 ZMIx NOTE When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before continuing operation. [Data type] Bit axis
Page 206B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT [Valid data range] –99999999 to 99999999 When the butt–type reference position setting function is used, this parameter sets a distance an axis, along which withdrawal is performed after the mechanical stopper is hit (distance from the mechanical st
Page 2074. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 7186 Torque limit value in butt–type reference position setting [Data type] Byte axes [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 This parameter sets a torque limit value in butt–type reference position setting. NOTE When 0 is set in this parameter
Page 208B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.6 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING REFERENCE MARKS General The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has reference marks (one–rotation signals) at intervals that change at a constant rate. By determining the reference mark int
Page 2094. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 JOG ZRN +J1 Reference mark ZRF1 Feedrate FL feedrate FL feedrate FL feedrate Fig. 4.6 (b) Time chart for reference position establishment Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1815 DCLx OPTx [Data type] Bit axis OPTx As a position detector: 0 : A separa
Page 210B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 1882 Intervals of mark 2 of the linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks. [Data type] 2–word axis [Unit of data] Detection units [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 Sets the intervals of mark 2 of the linear scale with absolute addressing
Page 2114. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 [Example parameter setting] When the following scale is used with an IS–B, millimeter machine Scale origin Positive Reference position Negative direction direction A B MarkMark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark Mark 20.000 19
Page 212B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT Caution CAUTION 1 In the following cases, the machine moves to the reference position without establishing the reference position as described above: S Axial movement is performed in ZRN mode when the reference position has already been established.
Page 2134. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Note NOTE 1 If automatic reference position return (G28) is specified when the reference position has not been established, the reference position is first established as described above, after which the machine is positioned to the reference positi
Page 214B–63173EN–1/01 4. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT 4.7 REFERENCE POSITION EXTERNAL SETTING General The machine is moved to a position to be specified as its reference position, for example, in the jog feed mode. Setting the reference position external setting signal to 1 specifies the current positi
Page 2154. REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1009 ZEXx [Data type] Bit axis ZEXx 0 : Disables the reference position external setting function. 1 : Enables the reference position external setting function. Alarm and message No. Description 093 Reference positi
Page 216B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION 203
Page 2175. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD General D Start of automatic When automatic operation start signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in which operation (cycle start) memory (AUTO) mode, DNC operation mode (RMT), or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the automatic operat
Page 218B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Halt of automatic When the feed hold signal *SP is set to 0 during automatic operation, the operation (feed hold) CNC enters the feed hold state and stops operation. At the same time, cycle start lamp signal STL is set to 0 and feed hold lamp signal SPL is set
Page 2195. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal Cycle start signal ST [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts automatic operation. [Operation] When signal ST is set to 1 then 0 in AUTO mode, DNC operation mode (RMT) or manual data input (MDI) mode, the CNC enters the cycle start state
Page 220B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cycle start lamp signal STL [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that automatic operation start is entered. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 or 0, according to the state of the CNC, as listed in Table 5.1. Feed hold lamp
Page 2215. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 D Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G007 ST G008 *SP #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP STL SPL Alarm and message D Self–diagnosis During automatic operation, the machine may sometimes show no information movement while no alarm is detected. In that case, the
Page 222B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.2 RESET AND REWIND General The CNC is reset and enters the reset state in the following cases: 1. When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0 2. When the external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1 3. When the reset and rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1 4. Whe
Page 2235. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 The following parameters are also used to select how to handle processing for CNC data when the CNC is reset. S Bit 7 (MCL) of parameter No. 3203 Whether programs created in MDI mode are erased or stored S Bit 6 (CCV) of parameter No. 6001 Whether custom macro v
Page 224B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Resetting signal RST [Classification] Output signal [Function] Notifies the PMC that the CNC is being reset. This signal is used for reset processing on the PMC. [Output condition] This signal is set to 1 in the following cases: 1. When the emergency st
Page 2255. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 3017 Output time of reset signal RST [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 16 ms [Valid data range] 0 to 255 To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added is specified in this parameter. RST signal output time = time required for reset + paramete
Page 226B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.3 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine PROGRAM actually or viewing the position displ
Page 2275. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Note NOTE 1 Automatic operation in the machine lock state (M, S, and T, and B commands) Machine lock applies only to move commands along controlled axes. Updating modal G codes or setting a coordinate system is performed normally. M, S, and T commands are also p
Page 228B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.3.2 Dry Run General Dry run is valid only for automatic operation. The tool is moved at a constant feedrate(*1) regardless of the feedrate specified in the program. This function is used, for example, to check the movement of the tool without a workpiece. CAUT
Page 2295. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G046 DRN Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 RDR TDR RDR [Data type] Bit TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84; tapping) 0 : Enabled 1 : Disabled RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command 0 : Dis
Page 230B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Specify the maximum cutting feedrate. A feedrate in the tangential direction is clamped in cutting feed so that it does not exceed the feedrate specified in this parameter. NOTE To specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis, use parameter No. 1430 instea
Page 2315. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 5.3.3 Single Block General Single block operation is valid only for automatic operation. When the single block signal (SBK) is set to 1 during automatic operation, the CNC enters the automatic operation stop state after executing the current block. In subsequent
Page 232B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6000 SBM [Data type] Bit SBM Custom macro statement 0: Not stop the single block 1: Stops the single block Caution CAUTION Operation in canned cycle When the SBK signal turns to “1” during canned cycle operation, the operation s
Page 2335. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF General This function selects whether the movement of the tool with manual operation (such as jog feed and manual handle/step feed) is counted for calculating the current position in the workpiece coordinate system. A check signal is a
Page 234B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION During automatic operation, if manual intervention of a block interrupts, the tool position moves in parallel by the manual move amount, regardless of the absolute or incremental command at the end point of that block, as well as at the end point of subsequent b
Page 2355. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP General When a slash followed by a number (/n, where n = 1 to 9) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip signals BDT1 to BDT9 are set to 1 during automatic operation, the information contained in the block for which /
Page 236B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 2. When BDTn is set to 1 while the CNC is reading a block containing /n, the block is not ignored. BDTn ”1” ”0” Reading by CNC ³ ...; /n N123 X100. Y200. ; N234 .... Not ignored 3. When BDTn, currently set to 1, is set to 0 while the CNC is reading a block conta
Page 2375. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G044 BDT1 G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2 Note NOTE 1 This function is ignored when programs are loaded into memory. Blocks containing /n are also stored in memory, regardless of how the optional block skip sig
Page 238B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.6 EXACT STOP General NC commands can be used to control a feedrate in continuous cutting feed blocks as described below. D Exact stop (G09) The tool is decelerated in a block specifying G09, and an in–position check (*1) is performed. When the feed motor falls
Page 2395. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 5.7 DNC OPERATION (Power Mate i–D (1–PATH CONTROL) General By starting automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a program is being read in via the reader/puncher interface. To use the DNC
Page 240B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G043 DNCI #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F003 MRMT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 ND3 Setting entry is accepted. [Data type] Bit ND3 In DNC operation, a program is: 0 : Read block by block. (A “DC3” code is output for each
Page 2415. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 5.8 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING General When rigid tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically stores inform
Page 242B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Start and completion time chart Rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT M29 command Spindle enable signal ENB rigid tapping signal RGTAP M29 completion signal FIN Spindle excitation Retract movement Rigid tapping retraction completion signal RTPT Fig. 5.8 Sta
Page 2435. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Time chart for stopping rigid tapping retraction Tapping retraction start signal RTNT Spindle enable signal ENB rigid tapping signal RGTAP Spindle excitation Retract movement When rigid tapping retract is stopped, spindle enable signal ENB is set to “0”, in the
Page 244B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G212 RTNT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F209 RTPT Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5200 DOV [Data type] Bit DOV For tool extraction during rigid tapping, override is: 0 : Disabled. 1 : Enabled. 5381 Override for rigid tapping re
Page 2455. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Caution CAUTION 1 If rigid tapping is stopped as a result of an emergency stop, the position on the rigid tapping axis is maintained but the spindle position is lost. In such a case, therefore, the positional relationship between the spindle and rigid tapping ax
Page 246B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 5.9 RETRACTION FOR TAPPING General When tapping is stopped, either as a result of an emergency stop or a reset, the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically stores information relati
Page 2475. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Start and completion time chart Tapping retraction start signal RTNT M05 command MF FIN M04 or M03 command S command SF Spindle speed (rpm) Retract movement Tapping retraction completion signal RTNT Fig. 5.9 Start and Completion Timing Chart D Description about
Page 248B–63173EN–1/01 5. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Signal Tapping retraction start signal RTNT [Classification] Input signal [Function] Starts tapping retraction. [Operation] When this signal is set to “1”, the control unit operates as follows: S Starts tapping retraction. Tapping retraction completion
Page 2495. AUTOMATIC OPERATION B–63173EN–1/01 Note NOTE 1 Before making a rigid tap return, make sure that the machine has been reset and is in the MDI mode. 2 The machining data for tapping retraction is maintained until a tapping command is subsequently specified, even while the power is turned off. tappi
Page 250B–63173EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 237
Page 2516. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 6.1 POSITIONING General The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. In the increm
Page 252B–63173EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Note NOTE The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.4.1 POSITIONING (G00) (B–63174EN) 239
Page 2536. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 6.2 LINEAR INTERPOLATION General Tools can move along a line A tools move along a line to the specified position at the feedrate specified in F. The feedrate specified in F is effective until a new value is specified. It need not be specified for each block.
Page 254B–63173EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION Parameter 1411 Cutting feedrate when the power is turned on Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 – 32767 6 – 32767 Inch mac
Page 2556. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1422 is effective. 2 If the setting for each axis is 0, the maximum feedrate specifie
Page 256B–63173EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.3 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION General The command below can move a tool along a circular arc in the defined plane. “Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive
Page 2576. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180_, and the other is more than 180_ are considered. Specify an arc mo
Page 258B–63173EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION G17: Plane Xp–Yp G18: Plane Zp–Xp G19: Plane Yp–Zp Only one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z, but two or more parallel axes can be set. Set value Meaning 0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis 1 X axis of the basic thre
Page 2596. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 011 NO FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate was not commanded COMMANDED or the feedrate was inadequate. Modify the program. 020 OVER TOLERANCE OF In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), RADIUS difference of the distance betwe
Page 260B–63173EN–1/01 6. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION 6.4 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION General Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement o
Page 2616. INTERPOLATION FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 5460 Axis (linear axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolation 5461 Axis (rotary axis) specification for polar coordinate interpolarion [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, ... control axes count These parameters set control axis numbers of
Page 2627. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL 249
Page 2637. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: FEEDRATE CONTROL 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse rat
Page 2647. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled 1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis [Data type] Two–word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C M
Page 2657. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp General A common upper limit can be set on the cutting feedrate along each axis with parameter No. 1422. If an actual cutting feedrate (with an override applied) exceeds a specified upper limit, it
Page 2667. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL NOTE 1 This parameter is effective only in linear and circular interpolation. In polar coordinate interpolation, the maximum feedrate for all axes specified in parameter No. 1422 is effective. 2 If the setting for each axis is
Page 2677. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.1.3 Feed Per Minute General D Feed per minute (G94) After specifying G94 (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G94 is a modal code. O
Page 2687. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/ Manual Feed Per Revolution General D Feed per revolution After specifying G95 (in the feed per revolution mode), the amount of feed of the tool per spindle revolution is to be directly specified by se
Page 2697. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.1.5 Override 7.1.5.1 Rapid traverse override General An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421). Also, 1% rapid traverse override select s
Page 2707. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal Rapid traverse override signal ROV1,ROV2 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals override the rapid traverse rate [Operation] These code signals correspond to the rates as follows: Rapid trave
Page 2717. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 ⋅ Signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 are inverted signals. To set an override value of 1%, set signals *HROV0 to *HROV6 to 1111110, which corresponds to a binary code of 0000001. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G014 ROV2 ROV1 G096
Page 2727. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.1.5.2 Feedrate override General A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program. For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specif
Page 2737. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 [Operation] Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified in cutting feed in automatic operation mode by the override value selected by this signal. The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal,
Page 2747. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G006 OVC 261
Page 2757. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.1.6 Feed Stop Function General During axis motion, the feed stop function checks a position deviation amount at all times. When the amount exceeds the “feed stop position deviation amount” set by the parameter (No. 1832), the
Page 2767. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2 ACCELERATION/ DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/ Deceleration General D Automatic acceleration/ To prevent a mechanical shock, acceleration/deceleration is automatically deceleration applied when the tool st
Page 2777. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Cutting feed: Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1622) Jog feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration (time constant per axis is set by parameter 1624) Rate after interpolation R
Page 2787. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1620 Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Specify a time constant
Page 2797. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axis [
Page 2807. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Example Fh: Rapid traverse feedrate X–axis feedrate α: Setting of parameter No. 1722 (feedrate reduction ratio) Fd: Feedrate where deceleration is terminated: = Fh×α/ 100 N1 G00 X- - ; N2 G00 X- - ; When the function of overlap
Page 2817. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell–shaped Acceleration/ Deceleration General Rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration smoothly increases or decreases the rapid traverse rate, reducing the stress and strain imposed on the mac
Page 2827. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Speed Rapid traverse rate Time T: Time constant for linear T acceleration/deceleration T Speed Rapid traverse rate T1: Set
Page 2837. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1621 Time constant t T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 512 Specify time constant T2 used for bell–shaped accelerati
Page 2847. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/ Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation General If linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is enabled (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610, CTL), acceleration/deceleration
Page 2857. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation is enabled when the CTL bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 1610) is specified. The time constants for cutting feed and jog feed for each axis are specified in parameter
Page 2867. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1624 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation or linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation, in jog feed for each axis. [Data type] Word axis [
Page 2877. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Note If the optional function for linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed is not provided, exponential acceleration/deceleration is always selected, irrespective of the setting. NOTE 1 If linear ac
Page 2887. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.4 Bell–Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation General The bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation provides smooth acceleration and deceleration to reduce stress and
Page 2897. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx [Data type] Bit axis CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1 : Linear acceleration/d
Page 2907. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1622 Time constant of exponential acceleration/deceleration, linear acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation, in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word axi
Page 2917. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Note NOTE 1 Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is executed during cutting feed and during a dry run. Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration can also be executed during jog feed if the JGL bit (bit 4 of parameter No. 1610) is
Page 2927. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 7.2.5 Linear Acceleration/ Deceleration before Cutting Feed Interpolation General A specified cutting feedrate can be linearly increased or decreased before interpolation. This function eliminates machining profile errors cause
Page 2937. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 If an overtravel alarm occurs during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the movement is decelerated and stopped. As deceleration and stop are performed after the alarm occurs, the tool will overrun by an amo
Page 2947. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL parameter No. 1631, set a time used to reach the maximum machining fee- drate. Feedrate Parameter 1: Parameter No. 1630 Parameter 1 Parameter 2: Parameter No. 1631 NOTE When 0 is set in parameter No. 1630 or par
Page 2957. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 1784 Feedrate when overtravel alarm has generated during acceleration/decelerationbeforeinterpolation [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter
Page 2967. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Note NOTE 1 If a block without a move command is found during acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the movement is decelerated and temporarily stopped in the previous block. 2 If a one–shot G code is specified during
Page 2977. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.2.6 Corner Control 7.2.6.1 In–position check General Whether the position of the servo motor is within a specified range is checked. If the in–position check function is enabled, the CNC checks the position during deceleratio
Page 2987. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Signal address . #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F104 INP8 INP7 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 NCI [Data type] Bit NCI Inposition check at deceleration 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed 1826 In–posit
Page 2997. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Signal See Subsection 7.2.6.1. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1601 NCI [Data type] Bit NCI Inposition check at deceleration 0 : Performed 1 : Not performed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1801 CIN CCI [Data type] Bit CCI The in–posi
Page 3007. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1827 In–position width in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set an in–position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is valid when bit 4 (CCI)
Page 3017. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.2.7 Axis Status Signals General This signal indicates the operation status of an axis being controlled by the Power Mate CNC. Signal Acceleration/ deceleration signals SUPn [Classification] Output signal [Function] Thi
Page 3027. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL Axis movement command ×fff 1. Distribution pulse 2. Pulses left in the accelera- tion/deceleration control sec- tion INPn IPLn SUPn Fig. 7.2.7 Axis Movement Status Signal Output Timing Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F22
Page 3037. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx [Data type] Bit axis CTLx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in dry run 0 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. 1 : Linear acceleration/d
Page 3047. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1620 Time constant used for linear acceleration/deceleration or bell–shaped accelera- tion/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 4000 Specify a time constan
Page 3057. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 Time constant t T2 used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid tra- 1621 verse for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0 to 512 Specify time constant T2 used for bell–shaped accelera
Page 3067. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION B–63173EN–1/01 AND DECELERATION CONTROL 1623 FL rate of exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] [Valid data range] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1 mm/
Page 3077. FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION CONTROL B–63173EN–1/01 7.2.8 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse General Feed–forward control can be performed even during rapid traverse. In this case, the servo position error is reduced, thus reducing the time required for positioning to within the spe
Page 308B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8 AUXILIARY FUNCTION 295
Page 3098. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 8.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION General D Miscellaneous Function When a numeral of up to 8 digits is specified following address M, code (M code) signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to turn on or off its functions. Usuall
Page 310B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION (5) Upon completion of the operation, the PMC sets completion signal FIN to 1. The completion signal is used by the miscellaneous function, spindle–speed function, tool function and other functions. If any of these functions are executed simultaneously, the compl
Page 3118. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 2b. Execution of a miscellaneous function after move command completion (1)(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)(7)(8) (9) M command Mxx Move command Code signals M00–M31 (*2) Strobe signal MF PMC side action End signal FIN Distribution end signals DEN TMF TFIN Signal Miscellaneou
Page 312B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Decode M signals DM00 , DM01 , DM02 , DM30 [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report particular miscellaneous functions are specified. The miscellaneous functions in a command program correspond to output sign
Page 3138. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Tool function code signals T00 to T31 Tool function strobe signal TF [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals report that tool functions have been specified. [Output condition] For the output conditions and procedure, see the d
Page 314B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G004 FIN #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F001 DEN F007 TF SF MF F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30 F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00 F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08 F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16 F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25
Page 3158. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight. Example : When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed. When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed. 3011 Acceptable w
Page 316B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3401 DPI [Data type] Bit DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point 0 : The least input increment is assumed. 1 : The unit of mm, inches, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type decimal point i
Page 3178. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 3411 M code preventing buffering 1 3412 M code preventing buffering 2 3413 M code preventing buffering 3 3420 M code preventing buffering 10 [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If processing di
Page 318B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.10.1 Miscellaneous function (M code) (B–63174EN) 305
Page 3198. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 8.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK General Inhibits execution of a specified M, S, and T function. That is, code signals and strobe signals are not issued. This function is used to check a program. Signal Auxiliary function lock signal AFL [Classification] Inpu
Page 320B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 8.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK General So far, one block has been able to contain only one M code. However, this function allows up to three M codes to be contained in one block. Up to three M codes specified in a block are simultaneously output to the
Page 3218. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 M command (MaaMbbMcc;) Code signal M00-M31 Strobe signal MF Code signal M200-M215 Strobe signal MF2 Code signal M300-M315 Strobe signal MF3 PMC side operation End signal FIN TMF TFIN Signal 2nd, 3rd M function code signal M200 to M215 M300 to M315
Page 322B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3404 M3B [Data type] Bit M3B The number of M codes that can be specified in one block 0 : One 1 : Up to three Caution CAUTION 1 M00, M01, M02, M30, M98, or M99 must not be specified together with another M code. 2 Some M codes ot
Page 3238. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 8.4 HIGH–SPEED M/S/T INTERFACE General To accelerate M/S/T function execution, the high–speed M/S/T interface has simplified the transfer of the strobe and completion signals of the M/S/T functions. Whether to use the usual system or high–speed system for strobe
Page 324B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Next block Code signal Mxx Myy Strobe signal MF PMC side operation Miscellaneous function completion signal MFIN Fig. 8.4 (a) Timing chart of the high–speed system Next block Code signal Mxx Myy Strobe signal MF PMC side operation Completion signal FIN Fig. 8.4 (
Page 3258. AUXILIARY FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Spindle function completion signal SFIN [Classification] Input signal [Function] Reports that the execution of a spindle speed function using the high–speed M/S/T interface is completed. [Operation] For the operation and procedure of the control unit whe
Page 326B–63173EN–1/01 8. AUXILIARY FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 The strobe signals MF, SF, and TF are “0” when the power is turned on. 2 When the control unit is reset, MF, SF, and TF are set to “0”. Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II.10.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION (B–63174EN) II.10.2 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A BLOCK
Page 3279. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 314
Page 328B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) General When up to five digits are specified after address S, code and strobe signals are sent out and used to control the spindle speed. The code signals are retained until another S code is issued. One S code is us
Page 3299. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.2 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT/SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT General There are two types of spindle motor control interfaces, spindle serial output and spindle analog output. The spindle serial output interface can control one serial spindle. The spindle analog output int
Page 330B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle control unit for Spindle control unit for spindle serial output inter- spindle analog output in- face terface Parameters for Specified as CNC parame- Directly specified for the the spindle con- ters spindle control unit trol unit (4000 to 4351/S1) Use
Page 3319. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal · Spindle control unit signals for the serial spindle (input), (output) → for the first serial spindle These addresses are on the CNC. Actually, however, they are input/output signals for the spindle control unit for t
Page 332B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter D Connection of serial spindle control unit #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3701 ISI [Data type] Bit ISI Specifieds whether the serial spindle interface is used. 0 : Used 1 : Not used NOTE This parameter is enabled only when the serial spindle interface opt
Page 3339. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR Acommunication error occurred for the serial spindle. The cause may be noises, discon- nection of an optical cable or the interruption of the power to the spindle amplifier. (Note) Unlike al
Page 334B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS SCREEN D Information on spindle control #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 400 SAI SSR POS SIC SIC 0: No module is available for spindle serial output. 1: A module for spindle serial output is available. POS 0: No module is available for spindle analog output.
Page 3359. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 D Load and speed meter readings for the serial spindle 410 Serial spindle: Load meter reading (%) 411 Serial spindle: Speed meter reading (rpm) To display the load and speed meter readings, the following parameters must be specified correctly. Maximum motor s
Page 336B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.3 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL General This section describes spindle speed control. It also explains the position coder and the spindle speed arrival signal (SAR). 323
Page 3379. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Command flow of The following chart summarizes spindle speed control. spindle speed control CNC PMC and machine Machining program, etc. ↓ Gear select signal output Output to the PMC ⋅ S command (GR3O, GR2O, GR1O) (to change the machine gear). ⋅S code/SF signa
Page 338B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D S command The S command specifies the spindle speed entered from machining programs, etc. for the CNC. For constant surface speed control (during G96 mode), the CNC converts the specified surface speed to the spindle speed. With bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No.
Page 3399. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Tapping cycle (G84, G74) When the spindle speed control is performed but the spindle speed override is not used, set the override value to 100%. D Processing for gear Although the S command contains the spindle speed, the object that is changing actually cont
Page 340B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION The speed commands output to the spindle motor are as follows: ⋅ For the serial spindle, the speed commands are processed as values 0 to 16383 between the CNC and spindle control unit. ⋅ For the analog spindle, the speed commands are output to the analog volt
Page 3419. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE If a specified voltage of 10 V is already higher than the acceptable input voltage for the spindle drive system, calculate the spindle speed that corresponds to 10 V using a proportional calculation method and use it instead. Now, in response to the spec
Page 342B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle motor speed command (analog voltage output) 10V VC VH GR3O VL GR1O GR2O Spindle speed command A B C (S code input) Vmin Vmaxl Vmaxh Vmax A× A× B× C× 4095 4095 4095 4095 VC: Voltage corresponding to the upper limit of output value to spindle motor. VH:
Page 3439. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 · Spindle speed A (Parameter No.3741) (rpm) with low-speed gears when the command voltage is 10V · Spindle speed B (Parameter No.3742) (rpm) with high-speed gears when the command voltage is 10V (medium-speed gear for 3-stage) · Spindle speed C (Parameter No.
Page 344B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D When Gear select signal change S code read To next block Gear select signal TM GR3O F /GR2O /GR1O SF FIN TMF TFIN Spindle speed command VH VL 0V Fig. 9.3 (e) Time chart when gear select signal changes In this case, the gear select signal is output; after el
Page 3459. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 In addition, for the speed command output to the spindle motor, analog voltages 0 to 10 V for analog spindle control correspond to digital data 0 to 16383 for serial spindle control. However, it might be easier if you consider them code signals from 0 to 4095
Page 346B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Reference→ Block Diagram for Analog Voltage Output With the constant surface speed control option equipped. CNC Power magnetics cabinet [Surface speed] M code Gear change command S(m/min) Spindle speed X–axis pres- command ent value Constant r S (rpm) surface
Page 3479. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Keep in mind the following: Even with bit 7 (TCW) of parameter No. 3706 = 1, the CNC cannot determine the output polarity if it has not issued M03/M04, and therefore, actual output does not work even if the speed command output has been specified. D Command o
Page 348B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Control unit max+10V SVC SVC Spindle speed 2mA analog voltage Name Connector/Pin ES Output ES output SVC JA8A/7 impedance 100Ω ES JA8A/5 ENB1 ENB Enable signal ENB1 JA8A/8 ENB2 ENB2 JA8A/9 WARNING Since the output voltage is a weak signal, do not relay it thr
Page 3499. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal Spindle stop signal *SSTP [Classification] Input signal [Function] The command output to the spindle is held. [Operation] When the spindle stop signal turns to “0” , the output voltage becomes 0V and the enable signal ENB turns to “0” (M05 is n
Page 350B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION low gear range, the gear select signal does not change and the command output is calculated and output to obtain the set speed at high gear. When the spindle motor speed is set by parameter GST (No. 3705#1)=1, the command output is output regardless of gear s
Page 3519. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Spindle speed override signal SOV0 to SOV7 [Classification] Input signal [Function] The spindle speed override signal specifies an override from 0% to 254% in 1% units for the S command sent to the CNC. [Operation] An override value in binary must be s
Page 352B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION CAUTION According to the conditions of item d above, note that if the circuit is so designed that SAR is turned to “0” simultaneously with the output of an S code and the change of spindle speed is gated with DEN signal, the operation will stop. That is, the
Page 3539. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 S12–bit code signal R01O to R12O [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal converts the spindle speed command value calculated by the CNC to code signals 0 to 4095. [Output condition] The relationship between the spindle speed c
Page 354B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal address G028 GR2 GR1 G029 *SSTP SOR SAR G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0 G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F001 ENB F007 SF F022 S07 S06 S05 S04 S03 S02 S01 S00 F023
Page 3559. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 SGB: Gear switching method 0 : Method A (Parameters No. 3741 to 3743 for the maximum spindle speed at each gear are used for gear selection.) 1 : Method B (Parameters No. 3751 and 3752 for the spindle speed at the gear switching point are used for gear select
Page 356B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 Type M: The gear selection signal is not entered. In response to an S command, the CNC selects a gear according to the speed range of each gear specified beforehand in parameters. Then the CNC reports the selection of a gear by outputting the gear sele
Page 3579. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 (5) After setting the parameter, specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage. Confirm that the output voltage is 10V. NOTE This parameter needs not to be set for serial spindles. Compensation value for the o
Page 358B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift Set value = ×4095 (For an analog spindle) Maximum spindle motor speed Minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor 3735 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 Set the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor. M
Page 3599. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 3744 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set the maximum spindle speed correspondi
Page 360B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 3751 Spindle motor speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 3752 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 4095 For gear switching method B, set the spindle motor speed when the gears are switched. Spi
Page 3619. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Spindle speed when switching from gear 1 to gear 2 during tapping 3761 Spindle speed when switching from gear 2 to gear 3 during tapping 3762 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 When method B is selected (SGT,#3 of parameter 3705
Page 362B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Maximum spindle speed 3772 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum speed of the spindle is specified , or the speed of the spindle
Page 3639. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.4 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL General With the spindle serial output or analog output function, specifying the surface speed (m/min or feet/min) directly in an S command makes it possible to change the spindle output continuously so as to maintain a cons
Page 364B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION N 2000rpm G2 When gear 2 selected G1 1000rpm When gear 1 selected 600rpm Spindle output (Volt) 0 V2 V1 10 Here, S = 60 m/min is given as the surface speed; if the position of the present X-axis cutter is 16 mm from the center, the spindle speed N becomes 600
Page 3659. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 R: Spindle speed (rpm) at maximum spindle motor speed (that is , spindle speed set by parameter No. 3741 to No. 3744) S: Surface speed (m/min) specified by S r: Radius value in the X-axis direction (m) (ii)G97 4095N D= R R: Spindle speed at maximum spindle mo
Page 366B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Parameter Maximum spindle speed for gear 1 3741 Maximum spindle speed for gear 2 3742 Maximum spindle speed for gear 3 3743 Maximum spindle speed for gear 4 3744 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm Axis as the calculation reference in constant surface speed c
Page 3679. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Maximum spindle speed 3772 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the maximum spindle speed. When a command specifying a speed exceeding the maximum spindle speed is specified, or the spindle speed exceeds the ma
Page 368B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.1.3 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED (B–63174EN) CONTROL (G96, G97) 355
Page 3699. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5 RIGID TAPPING 9.5.1 In a tapping cycle (G84/G74), synchronous control is applied to the General tapping operation of a tapping axis and the operation of the spindle. This capability eliminates the need to use a tool such as a float tapper, thus enabling h
Page 370B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.5.2 As shown in the figure below a gear can be inserted between the spindle Connection Among and spindle motor, and between the spindle and position coder. Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder Spindle control Error Spindle amplifier Spindle motor coun
Page 3719. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Example) Built–in position coder Spindle motor 1st gear set 30 : 70 2nd gear set 50 : 50 3rd gear set 70 : 30 Set value Parame- 512p/rev 1024p/ rev Meaning ter No. Position Position coder coder 5221 70 Number of teeth of the 1st gear for the spindle side 5222
Page 372B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION S Gear ratio is 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, If the gear ratio is either 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, and 1:8, it is set using parameters 1:8 (VGR=0) PG1 and PG2 (No. 3706 #0, #1). This applies if the position coder is mounted in a spindle or built into a spindle motor when only one sta
Page 3739. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Changing gears during rigid tapping requires a different process from that for gear changes during normal machining. As described above, changing gears conforms to the gear change specifications mentioned in section 9.3 when the M type gear selection method h
Page 374B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE This table show an example of three gears. For the basic spindle motor speed, refer to the spindle motor description manual. “+α” means that the spindle motor speed may slightly exceed the basic spindle motor speed. If the M type gear selection method is
Page 3759. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5.3 Rigid Tapping Specification D Feed rate In rigid tapping mode, the tapping axis is fed at a rate specified by F; the spindle speed is S360(deg/min). Override is invalid for both of them. An override of up to 200% can be applied to withdrawal operations
Page 376B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.5.4 Signal 9.5.4.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function Rigid tapping signal RGTAP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When M29 (miscellaneous function for preparation for rigid tapping) is specified, the PMC enters rigid tapping mode, then t
Page 3779. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Rigid tapping in–progress signal RTAP [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal notifies the PMC that rigid tapping mode is set. RTAP 1 : Rigid tapping mode is currently set. 0 : Rigid tapping mode is not currently set. By latching M29, th
Page 378B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION [2] T–type gear selection method SF output depends on the setting of bit 5 (NSF) of parameter No. 3705. In rigid tapping, when SF is to be used by the PMC to read an S code output signal for gear switching or output switching, set the above parameters as requ
Page 3799. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Gear selection signals (input) GR2, GR1 [Classification] Input signal [Operation] When T–type gear selection is being used, these signals are used in a PMC sequence for rigid tapping. The signals post, to the CNC, information about a spindle gear
Page 380B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Controlling spindle When the SIND signal is set to “1”, spindle output is controlled by the output by the PMC signals (SSIN, SGN, R1I to R12I) output from the PMC. At this time, the effect of ENB is as described above. In addition, when rigid tapping mode is
Page 3819. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 D When M–type gear When using a machine that features multiple gear stages for use with the selection is used spindle motor and spindle, and S is outside the previously selected gear range, the spindle–speed function strobe signal SF and gear sel
Page 382B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION 9.5.5 The timing chart for rigid tapping specification depends on the method Timing Charts for Rigid used to specify rigid tapping mode, the gear selection method (M–type or T–type), and whether to perform gear switching. Tapping Specification From the table,
Page 3839. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5.5.1 When M29 is specified before G84 (G74) M type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position lo
Page 384B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle *Gear output change motion SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart show an example wher
Page 3859. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First bllock Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.5.5.1 (c) Gear change is not
Page 386B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle *Gear output change motion SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an exam
Page 3879. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5.5.2 M29 and G84 (G74) are specified in the same block M type gear selection M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Positio
Page 388B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an example where the gear has shif
Page 3899. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.5.5.2 (c) When gear change is
Page 390B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle outpout SF S code out- put GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an example where the gea
Page 3919. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5.5.3 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters M type gear selection M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN
Page 392B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle output SF GR1O GR2O GR3O *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows an ex
Page 3939. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 T type gear selection method M29 RTAP First block Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally. ENB To be masked to the second block Spindle outoput SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Excitation SFR Position loop Fig. 9.
Page 394B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION M29 RTAP First blcok Second block G84 (G74) M29 is commanded internally ENB To be masked to the second blcok Spindle output SF S code output GR1 GR2 *SSTP SOR RGTAP 250ms or more FIN Rotation Gear change Excitation SFR Position loop Note This time chart shows
Page 3959. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5.5.4 When rigid tapping is completed, the mode is canceled if a G code (such Timing to cancel rigid as G80, canned cycle G code, or Group 01 G code) is issued. The spindle output is produced in the same way as executing S0. Cancel tapping mode the PMC rigi
Page 396B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION WARNING 1 If rigid tapping mode is canceled by a Group 01 G code, such as G00 or G01, the block containing the G code is executed at the same time the ENB signal is turned to “0”. Therefore, if a block contains an M code for controlling the spindle, an error
Page 3979. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.5.6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Parameter SFA NSF SGT ESF 3705 [Data type] Bit ESF When the spindle control function (S analog outpu or S serial output) is used, and the consatant surface speed control function is used or bit 7 (GTT) of parameter No. 3705 is se
Page 398B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3706 GTT PG2 PG1 [Data type] Bit PG2, PG1 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Magnifi- PG2 PG1 cation 1 0 0 Magnification 2 0 1 Number of spindle revolutions 4 1 0 Number of position coder revolutions 8 1 1 GTT Selection of a
Page 3999. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Spindle motor speed Max. output (4095, 10V) Spindle motor max. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3736) Spindle motor min. clamp speed (Parameter No. 3735) Spindle speed command Max. speed Max. speed Max. speed (S command) at gear1 at gear2 at gear3 parameter paramet
Page 400B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 FHD PCP DOV CRG VGR G84 5200 [Data type] Bit G84 Method for specifying rigid tapping 0 : An M code specifying the rigid tapping mode is specified prior to the issue of the G84 (or G74) command. (See parameter No. 5210). 1 : An M code s
Page 4019. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Rigid tapping mode specification M code 5210 [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 255 This parameter sets an M code that specifies the rigid tapping mode. To set an M code larger than 255, set it to parameter No. 5212. NOTE The M code is judged to be 29 (
Page 402B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Number of spindle gear teeth (first–stage gear) 5221 Number of spindle gear teeth (second–stage gear) 5222 Number of spindle gear teeth (third–stage gear) 5223 [Data type] Word [Valid data range] 1 to 32767 These parameters set the number of gear teeth on the
Page 4039. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (first–stage gear) 5241 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (second–stage gear) 5242 Maximum spindle speed in rigid tapping (third–stage gear) 5243 [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] rpm [Valid data range] Spindle an
Page 404B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation (first–stage gear) 5271 Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operation 5272 (second–stage gear) Time constant for the spindle and tapping axis in extraction operati
Page 4059. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 5281 (first–stage gear) Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping axis in rigid tapping 5282 (second–stage gear) Position control loop gain for the spindle and tapping a
Page 406B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 1) 5291 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 2) 5292 Spindle loop gain multiplier in the rigid tapping mode (for gear 3) 5293 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] [Valid d
Page 4079. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Example) When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows: SPINDLE MOTOR E = 1.667 (V) Position (A motor speed of 6000 rpm corresponds to 10 Spindle coder V.) L = 360° (One rotation of the spindl
Page 408B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle in–position width in rigid tapping 5301 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the in–position width of a spindle in rigid tapping. CAUTION The broad in–position width deteriorates the screw pr
Page 4099. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Example) When the spindle motor, spindle, and position coder are connected as shown left, let the variables be as follows: SPINDLE S = 3600 MOTOR G = 3000 Position Spindle coder L = 360_ (One spindle rotation per spindle motor rotaion) = La / 4096 = 720_/40
Page 410B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Spindle backlash in rigid tapping 5321 [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 127 These parameters set the spindle backlash in rigid tapping. 9.5.7 Alarm and Message Number Message Description 200 ILLEGAL S CODE COM- In the rig
Page 4119. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Number Message Description 413 SERVO ALARM: n–th The contents of the error register for the AXIS – LSI OVERFLOW n–th axis (axis 1–2 of rigid tapping axis) are beyond the range of –231 to 231. This error usually occurs as the result of an improperly set parame
Page 412B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION NOTE 1 A spindle pitch error is not compensated for in rigid tapping mode. Drift compensation is not made with an analog spindle. 2 The maximum number of pulses that can be distributed to the spindle is: ⋅ 32,767 pulses per 8 msec for a serial spindle ⋅ 4,096
Page 4139. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 4044 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 1, gear 2) 4045 Proportional gain of the velocity loop in servo mode (gear 3) [Unit of data] [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Set a proportional gain for the velocity loop in a servo mode (such as r
Page 414B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION CAUTION 1 Set a loop gain for spindle position control in rigid tapping using a serial spindle. In these parameters, basically, set the same values as those set in parameter Nos. 5280 and 5281 to 5283 (loop gains for position control of the tapping axis). Whi
Page 4159. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.6 SPINDLE ORIENTATION General This function stops the spindle at a specified position. The spindle can be stopped in either of the following two ways. · The spindle is mechanically stopped by using stoppers. · The spindle is stopped by applying a function o
Page 416B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00 G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 OR1 3702 [Data type] Bit OR1 Whether the stop–position external–setting type orientation function is use
Page 4179. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 9.7 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING General Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output chara
Page 418B–63173EN–1/01 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION D When gear selection output signals, GR2O and GR1O , are used (in which constant surface speed control is not provided and GTT, bit 4 of parameter No. 3706, is set to 0) Set two gears, which are almost the same. (Example: Value of parameter No.
Page 41910. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63173EN–1/01 10 TOOL FUNCTIONS 406
Page 420B–63173EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS 10.1 TOOL FUNCTION General Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address T. When a T code is specified, the code signal and strobe signal correspond- ing to the specified tool number are issued. The machine sel
Page 42110. TOOL FUNCTIONS B–63173EN–1/01 10.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE/ TOOL COMPENSATION NUMBER/ TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY General ÇÇÇ Standard position ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ Tool com- pensation ÇÇÇ value Fig. 10.2(a) Tool compensation value Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the CRT/MDI panel o
Page 422B–63173EN–1/01 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL II 12.2 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, (B–63174EN) NUMBER OF COMPENSATION VAL- UES, AND ENTERING VALUES FROM THE PROGRAM (G10) 409
Page 42311. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 11 PROGRAM COMMAND 410
Page 424B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/ POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING General Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following a
Page 42511. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 007 ILLEGAL USE OF DEC- Decimal point “ · ” input error (A decimal IMAL POINT point was input after an address with which it can not be used. Or multiple decimal points were input.) Modify the program. Reference item OPE
Page 426B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.2 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION General A program consists of the following components: Table 11.2 Program components Components Descriptions Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc. Program start
Page 42711. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99 [Data type] Bit N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be
Page 428B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.3 CUSTOM MACRO 11.3.1 Custom Macro General Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general program
Page 42911. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 P : Macro number of bolt hole circle r : Radius α : Start angle β : Angle between circles k Number of circles Signal Custom Macro Input Signal UI000 to UI015 [Classification] Input signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These
Page 430B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Custom Macro Output Signal UI000 to UI015 UO100 to UO131 [Classification] Output signal [Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a custom macro as a type of system variable, and are
Page 43111. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter D Setting for single block stop #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6000 SBM [Data type] Bit SBM Custom macro statement 0 : Not stop the single block 1 : Stops the single block D Other settings #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6001 CLV CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT [Data type] Bit PRT
Page 432B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D Setting when macro statement is input/output with EIA code #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0 6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0 6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0 6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0 [Data type] Bit These parameters ar
Page 43311. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by G00. D Setting M codes that call subprograms of program Nos.9001 to 9009 6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001 6072 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9002 6073
Page 434B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 6089 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9029 [Valid data range] 1 to 99999 These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 through 9029. NOTE Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called by M00. D
Page 43511. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 076 ADDRESS P NOT Address P (program number) was not com- DEFINED manded in the block which includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program. 077 SUB PROGRAM The subprogram was called in five folds. NESTING ERROR
Page 436B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Number Message Description 125 FORMAT ERROR IN format is erroneous. Modify the MACRO program. 126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x 3 is not established. Modify the program. 127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT NC and custom macro commands coexist. IN SAME BLOCK Modi
Page 43711. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 11.3.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro General When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an interrupt
Page 438B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx. When the interrupt signal (UINT, marked by * in Fig. 11.3.2) is input during execution of the int
Page 43911. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code 0 : M96/M97 1 : M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034) MSB Interrupt program 0 : Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro–type interrupt) 1 : Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram– ty
Page 440B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND 11.4 CANNED CYCLE General Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles, normally more than one block is req
Page 44111. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 SPINDLE CONTROL In some canned cycles, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be output. The following canned cycles require spindle control: Reverse tapping cycle G74 Fine boring cycle G76 Tapping cycle G84 Boring cycle G86 Back boring cy
Page 442B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND D G74 (Counter tapping cycle) X, Y Z Z Z Dwell Dwell (Note) (Note) Note) It is possible to not output M05 M03 M05 M04 M05 code by using parame- ter M5T (No. 5101#6). MF MF MF MF Next block FIN FIN FIN FIN D G76 (Fine boring cycle) X, Y X or Y Z Z Dwell (Note) M05 M
Page 44311. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 D G86 (Boring cycle) X, Y Return to initial level Z Z M05 M03 MF MF FIN FIN Next block D G87 (Back boring cycle) X or Y X or Y X, Y X or Y Z Z Z Dwell (Note 2) (Note 2) M05 M19 M03 M05 M19 M03 MF MF MF MF MF MF FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN D G88 (Boring cycle) (Note 1)
Page 444B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Tapping signal During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal is also output while the G code of the tapping cycle is valid. Override During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%. Feed hold When the feed hold key is pres
Page 44511. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 Signal Tapping signal TAP [Classification] Output signal [Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode. [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when: – The system is in tapping cycle mode. G74, G84 The signal is set to 0 when: – The system is not
Page 446B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Return value of high–speed peck drilling cycle G73 5114 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 This parameter sets the return value in h
Page 44711. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 Clearance of canned cycle G83 5115 [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Metric input 0.01 0.001 0.001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 inch [Valid data range] to G83 q : Depth of cut d : Clearance value R point q d q d q Z p
Page 448B–63173EN–1/01 11. PROGRAM COMMAND Reference item OPERATOR’S MANUAL III.2.1 Canned cycle (B–63174EN) 435
Page 44911. PROGRAM COMMAND B–63173EN–1/01 11.5 MACRO COMPILER/ EXECUTER General There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type. The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are machining program
Page 450B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 437
Page 45112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.1 DISPLAY/SET 12.1.1 Clock Function General Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day. The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time will be told
Page 452B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.2 Displaying Operation History General This function displays a history of the key and signal operations, performed by the CNC operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or CNC alarm. The history can also be displayed for previously generated CNC alarms. The
Page 45312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 3122 Time interval used to record time data in operation history [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Minutes [Valid data range] 0 to 1439 Time data is recorded in operation history at set intervals. When 0 is specified in this parameter, 10 minutes is assumed as the d
Page 454B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.3 Help Function General The help function displays on the screen detailed information about alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following information is displayed. D Detailed information of When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneo
Page 45512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.1.5 Servo Tuning Screen General On the servo tuning screen, parameters required for basic adjustment of the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3111 SVS [Data type] Bit SVS Servo tuning screen 0 :
Page 456B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.7 Self–diagnosis General When a breakdown occurs, in order to quickly determine the cause, the following should be done. First, it has to be determined as to whether the breakdown occurred in the CNC internal section, or the PMC or machine side. There are tim
Page 45712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.1.8 Display of Hardware and Software Configuration General The required hardware/software configuration for CNC maintenance can be displayed on the screen. The system configuration screen displays the following information: (1) Printed circuit board configurati
Page 458B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.9 Run Hour and Parts Count Display General This function displays the integrated power–on time, the integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer (started by an input signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle operation time
Page 45912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 General–purpose integrating meter start signal TMRON [Classification] Input signal [Function] The CNC has an integrating meter which is started by an input signal from the PMC, as well as integrating meters for counting the automatic operation time and co
Page 460B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6711 Number of machined parts Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] One piece [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code s
Page 46112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 6750 Integrated value of power–on period Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] One minute [Valid data range] 0 to 99999999 This parameter displays the integrated value of power–on period. 6751 Operation time (integrated value of time dur
Page 462B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 6755 Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Two–word [Unit of data] One ms [Valid data range] 0 to 60000 6756 Integrated value of general–purpose integrating meter drive signal (T
Page 46312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.1.10 Software Operator’s Panel General The software operator’s panel function replaces part of the control switches on the machine operator’s panel with soft switches which can be turned on or off using the MDI of the control unit. The control switches for the
Page 464B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Signal Group Function Output signal Related input signal 1 Mode selection MD1O MD1 MD2O MD2 MD4O MD4 ZRNO ZRN 2 Jog feed axis select +J1O – +J4O +J1 – +J4 –J1O – –J4O –J1 – –J4 Manual rapid tra- RTO RT verse 3 Ha
Page 46512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O F074 F075 *SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO F076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O F077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO F078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O F0
Page 466B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT OP7 Feed hold on software operator’s panel 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7202 NS0 NS2 [Data type] Bit NS2 0 : Uses the software operator’s panel general–purpose switches. 1 : Does not use the software operator’s panel general–purpose swit
Page 46712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 7215 MNSKY3 [Data type] Bit [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 This parameter specifies a key value used with the –direction key for the third jog feed axis on the software operator’s panel. 7216 PLSKY4 [Data type] Bit [Valid data range] 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8
Page 468B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Parameter No. 7220: Sets the character code (083) corresponding to S of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7221: Sets the character code (073) corresponding to I of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7222: Sets the character code (071) corresponding to G of SIGNAL 1. Parameter No. 7223
Page 46912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 Character to Code Correspondence Table Char- Com- Char- Char- Com- Char- Code Code Comment Code Code Comment acter ment acter acter ment acter A 065 6 054 177 209 B 066 7 055 178 210 C 067 8 056 179 211 D 068 9 057 180 212 E 069 032 Space 181 213 F 070 ” 034 Quota
Page 470B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT The kanji and hiragana below take up the equivalent of two alphanumeric characters. Example To display the character ” ” (character code 002006) as the first character on the software operator’s panel general switch top line, specify the following parameters as st
Page 47112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 458
Page 472B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 459
Page 47312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 460
Page 474B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 461
Page 47512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 Note NOTE 1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode for DNC operation is to be equipped, for example, all control switches for mode selection should be on the machine operator’s panel or a general–purpose soft switch should be us
Page 476B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT NOTE 4 The following table lists the override values which can be selected by soft switches for jog feedrate. *JV00 – *JV150 (*JV0 – *JV150) 15 12 8 4 0 Override ± ± ± ± ± values (%) bit 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.1 2 1
Page 47712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE 5 The following table lists the override values which can be selected by soft switches for feedrate override. *FV0O – *FV7O (*FV0 – *FV7) Override 7 4 0 values (%) 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 10 2 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 20 3 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 30 4 1 1
Page 478B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.1.11 Multi–language Display General The LCD screens are displayed in a parameter–set language. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3102 SPN ITA FRN GRM JPN [Data type] Bit type NOTE When this parameter is set, turn off the power once. These bits select the langua
Page 47912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.1.12 Periodic Maintenance Screen General The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those consumables that require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD backlight, touch pad, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is indicated by t
Page 480B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (1)Consumables names The names of consumables to be subjected to periodic maintenance are set up here. They can be registered using either the corresponding menu or MDI keys. 1) Menu–based setup 1 To display the setting menu, place the cursor on the desired item,
Page 48112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 [Machine consumables screen] PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (MACHINE) ITEM NAME 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05 [ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ] [ SELECT ][ ][ CLEAR ][ +INPUT ][ INPUT ] [ ][ ][ ][ CAN ][ EXEC ] [ ][ R
Page 482B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT [CNC consumables screen] PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345 (NC) ITEM NAME 01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 03 FAN MOTOR 04 LCD BACK LIGHT 05 06 07 08 09 10 >_ EDIT *** ***** *** **** 19:27:05 [ ][ STATUS ][ MACHIN ][ NC ][ (OPRT) ] [ SELECT ][
Page 48312. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE No setup can be made on the status screen. Setup is possible only on the setting screen. (3) Count status The count status of each item is displayed at the left of the corresponding item number as listed below: Display Count status Blank Counting is at a halt
Page 484B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT (1) Service life The service life of consumables can be specified here. To specify the service life, key in the corresponding data and press the [INPUT] soft key (or INPUT key). The same data is set up as both the service life and remaining lifetime. In addition,
Page 48512. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 (3) Count type The way counting is carried out can be specified here. Pressing the [TYPE] causes the following count types to be displayed as soft keys. Select the desired one and press the [EXEC] soft key to set it up. Software Meaning Display [EFFECT] No countin
Page 486B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT Format G10 L61 P01 [n] ; G10 L61 P02 [n] ; G10 L61 P03 [n] ; : a : Service life r : Remaining lifetime n : Item name [Alphanumeric character] q : Count type 0 = No counting. 1 = Nonstop counting. 2 = Counting continues as long as the power is on. 3 = Counting cont
Page 48712. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.2 EDIT 12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length General One of the following part program length can be selected. Power Matei–D (m) 10 20 40 80 160 Power Matei–H (m) – – 40 80 160 Alarm and message Number Message Description 070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is
Page 488B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2.3 Memory Protection Key General A key called the data protection key is used to prevent part programs, offset values, parameters, and setting data from being registered, modified, or deleted erroneously. Signal Memory protection signal KEY1 to KEY4
Page 48912. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 KEY KEY For memory protection keys: 0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used. NOTE The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or KEY = 1. Alarm and message Warning mess
Page 490B–63173EN–1/01 12. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT 12.2.4 Background Editing General Editing a program while executing another program is called background editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing (foreground editing). A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground
Page 49112. DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B–63173EN–1/01 12.2.5 Playback General In TEACH IN JOG/HANDLE mode (TJOG) and TEACH IN STEP/HANDLE mode (THND), a machine position along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual operation is stored in memory as a program position to create a program. The words other than X, Y, an
Page 492B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 479
Page 49313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 13.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE General The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface. 1. Program 2. Offset data 3. Parameter 4. Pitch error compensation data 5. Custom macro common variables. 480
Page 494B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Parameter To enable input/output of data (such as programs and parameters) with external input/output units via an I/O unit interface (RS–232–C serial port), it is necessary to set the parameters described below. Power Mate i –H has three channels of input/out
Page 49513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 2 0 : Select the device of channel 1 1 : Select the device of channel 1 2 : Select the device of channel 2 This CNC has three channels f
Page 496B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA This CNC Channel 1 Channel 2 RS–232–C JD42 ÂÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂÂÂ Reader/puncher Reader/puncher I/ O CHANNEL=0 I/ O CHANNEL=2 or I/ O CHANNEL=1 (1) Parameters common to all channels #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0100 ENS NCR CTV Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit typ
Page 49713. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output 0 : Output 1 : Not output NOTE When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1. 0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0) [Data type] Byte Se
Page 498B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA (3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0111 NFD ASI SB2 [Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. 0112 Number specified for the input/outpu
Page 49913. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 Alarm and message Number Message Description 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. 002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will be generated only when the TV
Page 500B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA 13.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL General It is possible to request from the outside that a program be registered, collated, or output. D Registeration/Collation As triggered by the external read start signal EXRD, the background edit function saves programs fr
Page 50113. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 D There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered or collated. For example, a program cannot be registered or collated, if a program with the same program number is being executed in the foreground processing. External Punch St
Page 502B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Background editing signal BGEACT [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that the background edit function is operating. [Output condition] This signal becomes logical 1 when: D The [BG EDIT] soft key is pressed to put the CNC
Page 50313. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 Read/punch alarm signal RPALM [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registeration, collation, or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal. [Output conditi
Page 504B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Signal Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY Parameter Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020) ↓ 0020 I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data I/O CHANNEL=0 Number specified for the in- Sp
Page 50513. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B–63173EN–1/01 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No. 3201 = 0, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be: 0 : Completed 1 : Not completed #7 #6 #5 #4 #3
Page 506B–63173EN–1/01 13. INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA Alarm and message Number Message Description 079 BP/S ALARM In memory or program collation,a pro- gram in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in memory and those from the external device. 085 BP/S ALARM Whe
Page 50714. MEASUREMENT B–63173EN–1/01 14 MEASUREMENT 494
Page 508B–63173EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT 14.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT General The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key. Call offset value display screen on the CRT. Relative positions are also displayed on this screen. Then select the referenc
Page 50914. MEASUREMENT B–63173EN–1/01 14.2 SKIP FUNCTION 14.2.1 Skip Function General Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is interrupted and the
Page 510B–63173EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec. 2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP or from the machine tool; the PMC no longer requires to process the signal. 3 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal termin
Page 51114. MEASUREMENT B–63173EN–1/01 Note NOTE 1 The G31 block is always set to G01 mode. The feedrate is specified by an F code. 2 When the measuring motion is made by utilizing the skip signal, program a constant feedrate; otherwise, if the feedrate changes, the measuring error will be noticeable. With
Page 512B–63173EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT 14.2.2 Multi–step Skip General In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multi-step skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable and cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be moved when a skip signal (8 points) or high-speed sk
Page 51314. MEASUREMENT B–63173EN–1/01 · When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit stops dwell operation, and cancels any remaining dwell time. · The skip signal is monitored not for a rising edge,
Page 514B–63173EN–1/01 14. MEASUREMENT #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6209 DSK [Data type] Bit DSK 0 : Disables skip signal SKIPP from the PMC for the dwell skip function. 1 : Enables skip signal SKIPP from the PMC for the dwell skip function. Note NOTE The skip cutting commands G31 P1, G31 P2, G31 P3, and G31 P4
Page 51515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 502
Page 516B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL General The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC. In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying moving distance and fe
Page 51715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 PMC CNC DI/ DO Commands from path 1 Group A α axis control Commands from path 2 Group B β axis control Commands from path 3 Group C γ axis control Commands from path 4 Group D ε axis control Commands from path 5 Group E ε axis control Commands from path 6 Grou
Page 518B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC–controlled automatic operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis contro
Page 51915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 ⋅ command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer; ⋅ command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer; and ⋅ command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block (axis control block data signal).
Page 520B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued. When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 to “0”. Before setting these signals to “0”, however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC’s input, wai
Page 52115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 No. Symbol Signal name 17 EINPg In–position signal 18 ECKZg Following zero checking signal 19 EIALg Alarm signal 20 EGENg Axis moving signal 21 EDENg Auxiliary function executing signal 22 EOTNg Negative–direction overtravel signal 23 EOTPg Positive–direction
Page 522B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Signal Detail 1 Control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] When the signal is set to “1”, the corresponding axis becomes subject to PMC control. When the signal is set to “0”, PMC control becomes invalid. Changing the
Page 52315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Axis control command Operation (hexadecimal code) Cutting feed – feed per revolution (exponential acceleration/ deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter- polation) 02h Performs the same operation as G95 G01, used by the CNC. Skip – feed per
Page 524B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Axis control command Operation (hexadecimal code) Speed command (linear acceleration/deceleration) 10h Performs continuous feed at the specified speed. Torque control 11h Continuous feed under torque control Auxiliary function 12h Performs the same function as
Page 52515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 First reference position When using the 1st reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: return for an incomplete 07h), if DLZ, bit 1 of parameter No. 1002, specifying reference position reference position return return without dogs for all axes, or DLZx,
Page 526B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Machine coordinate The machine coordinate system selection command (EC0g to EC6g: system selection 20h) performs absolute positioning to move the tool in rapid traverse to a specified position on the machine coordinate system. This command is used to move the
Page 52715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 (2) Switching from torque control to position control (canceling torque control mode) Torque control mode is canceled when any of the following conditions is satisfied: 1) The reset signal ECLRg is brought to “1”. 2) A servo alarm is issued. 3) An OT alarm is
Page 528B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION The following table shows the correspondence between the axis control commands and their data: Command block Axis control code Operation Command data signal EC0g to EC6g Rapid traverse 00h Total moving distance EID0g to EID31g Rapid traverse rate EIF0g to EIF1
Page 52915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Axis control code Operation Command data signal EC0g to EC6g Auxiliary function 12h Auxiliary function code EID0g to EID15g Machine coordinate 20h Machine coordinate system setting system setting (absolute value) EID0g to EID31g Rapid traverse rate EIF0g to EI
Page 530B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION [Unit of data] When bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 Data unit Unit IS–B IS–C Linear Metric machine 1 0.1 mm/min axis Inch machine 0.01 0.01 inch/min Rotation axis 1 0.1 deg/min When bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 Data unit Unit IS–
Page 53115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 WARNING 1 The value of parameter No. 8022 is used as the upper limit for clamping the feedrate. 2 Override for the feedrate is effective. Dry run is invalid. CAUTION The specified feedrate can be magnified by 1, 10, or 100 by setting bits 6 (FR1) and 7 (FR2) o
Page 532B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION D Maximum feedrate (with override of 254%) IS–B IS–C Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input Magnified 166458 1664.58 16645mm/min 166.45inch/ by 1 mm/min inch/min min Magnified 240000 9600inch/min 100000 1664.58inch/ by 10 mm/min mm/min min CAUTION The
Page 53315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Gears Speed command Amplifier Motor ↑ (b) Axis Detector ↑ (a) (a) The speed command for PMC axis control requires specification of the servo motor speed, not the feedrate along an axis. To specify a feedrate along the axis when gears are used to link the servo
Page 534B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION NOTE The data units will be cm/min when a linear motor is being used. 4 Axis control data signals EID0g to EID31g [Classification] Input signal [Function] [Unit of data] IS–B IS–C Unit Metric input 0.001 0.0001 mm Degree input deg Inch input 0.0001 0.00001 inc
Page 53515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 (6) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) For this command, signal EID31g is used to specify the direction of continuous feed, as follows: 0: Positive direction 1: Negative direction Signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined. (7) Auxiliary functions (EC0g to EC6g: 1
Page 536B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 5 Axis control command read signal EBUFg [Classification] Input signal [Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control. See “Basic procedure” for details of the operation performed when this signal is set from “0” to “1” or from
Page 53715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 8 Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal is set to “1”, the following is performed: (1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the tool. (2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the
Page 538B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 11 Auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g [Classification] Output signal 12 Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg [Classification] Output signal 13 Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg [Classification] Input signal [Function] When an auxiliary fu
Page 53915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 15 Buffering disable signal EMBUFg [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal is set to “1”, commands from the PMC are not read while the executing, waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to “1” when any of these buffer
Page 540B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (3) External pulse synchronization – first manual handle (EC0g to EC6g: 0Dh) (4) External pulse synchronization – second manual handle (EC0g to EC6g: 0Eh) (5) Speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) 16 Control axis selection status signal *EAXSL [Classification] Out
Page 54115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 18 Following zero checking signal ECKZg [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when following zero check or in–position check is being performed for the corresponding PMC–controlled axis. 19 Alarm signal EIALg [Classification] Outp
Page 542B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 20 Axis moving signal EGENg [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when the tool is moving along the corresponding PMC–controlled axis according to commands such as rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed (EC0g to EC6g:
Page 54315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 22 Negative–direction overtravel signal EOTNg 23 Positive–direction overtravel signal EOTPg [Classification] Output signal [Function] These signals are set to “1” when an overtravel alarm is detected. When the stroke limit in the negative direction is exceeded
Page 544B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 26 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E and ROV2E [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently of the CNC, by setting bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001. Rapid traverse ove
Page 54515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 29 Override 0% signal EOV0 [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is set to “1” when the feedrate override is 0%. 30 Skip signal ESKIP [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal is set to “1” during executing the skip cutting comm
Page 546B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 34 Accumulated zero check signal ELCKZg [Classification] Input signal [Function] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at a subsequent cutting feed command. (1) Cutting feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) (2) Cutti
Page 54715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA ELCKZA EFINA G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A For group A G146 EID7A
Page 548B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC ELCKZC EFINC G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C For group C G170 EID7C
Page 54915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G464 EBUFE ECLRE ESTPE ESOFE ESBKE EMBUFE ELCKZE EFINE G465 EMSBKE EC6E EC5E EC4E EC3E EC2E EC1E EC0E G466 EIF7E EIF6E EIF5E EIF4E EIF3E EIF2E EIF1E EIF0E G467 EIF15E EIF14E EIF13E EIF12E EIF11E EIF10E EIF9E EIF8E For group E G468 EID7E
Page 550B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G488 EBUFG ECLRG ESTPG ESOFG ESBKG EMBUFG ELCKZG EFING G489 EMSBKG EC6G EC5G EC4G EC3G EC2G EC1G EC0G G490 EIF7G EIF6G EIF5G EIF4G EIF3G EIF2G EIF1G EIF0G G491 EIF15G EIF14G EIF13G EIF12G EIF11G EIF10G EIF9G EIF8G For group G G492 EID7G
Page 55115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 CNC→PMC ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F112 EADEN8 EADEN7 EADEN6 EADEN5 EADEN4 EADEN3 EADEN2 EADEN1 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA For F131 EABUFA EMFA group A F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A E
Page 552B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F503 EBSYF EOTNF EOTPF EGENF EDENF EIALF ECKZF EINPF For F504 EABUFF EMFF group F F505 EM28F EM24F EM22F EM21F EM18F EM14F EM12F EM11F #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F506 EBSYG EOTNG EOTPG EGENG EDENG EIALG ECKZG EINPG For F507 EABUFG EMFG gro
Page 55315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1803 TRF [Data type] Bit TRF In torque control mode, 0 : Follow–up is not performed. 1 : Follow–up is performed. 1885 Permissible value of integrated travel distance under torque control [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] De
Page 554B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2000 DGPRx [Data type] Bit axis DGPRx At power–ON, the torque constant (parameter No. 2105): 0 : Is automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor. 1 : Is not automatically set to the standard value specific to the motor.
Page 55515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE [Data type] Bit MLE Whether machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC–controlled axes 0 : Valid 1 : Invalid NOTE Each–axis machine lock signals MLK1 to MLK8 are always valid, regardless of the setting of this
Page 556B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 SUE DWE RPD [Data type] Bit RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC–controlled axes 0 : Feedrate specified with parameter No. 1420 1 : Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command DWE Minimum tim
Page 55715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8003 PIM NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off then back on again to make the setting effective. [Data type] Bit PIM If a linear axis is controlled solely by the PMC, the commands for that axis are: 0 : Affected
Page 558B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8005 DRR R10 [Data type] Bit R10 When the RPD parameter (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unit for specifying a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is: 0 : 1 mm/min. 1 : 10 mm/min. DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC a
Page 55915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 8028 Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for jog feed specified by the speed command for each PMC–controlled axis [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] msec/1000 rpm [Valid data range] 0 to 32767 Specify, for each PMC–controlled axis, the time needed
Page 560B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION (1) P/S Alarm Number Message Description 130 ILLEGAL AXIS An axis control command was given by OPERATION PMC to an axis controlled by CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis controlled by PMC. Modify the program. 139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC A PM
Page 56115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Caution CAUTION 1 Emergency stop or machine lock is enabled. Machine lock can be disabled if the MLE bit (bit 0 of parameter No. 8001) is specified accordingly. However, machine lock for an individual axis is always enabled. 2 In consecutive cutting feed block
Page 562B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT General The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC. Signal name Signal code Data signal for external data input (input) ED0 to ED15 Address signal for external data input (input) EA0 to EA6 Read signal for exte
Page 56315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Kind of data accessed by external data input E ED15 to ED0 SEEE EEEE No No. Item TAAA AAAA 15141312 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 B65 4 321 0 External program rogram number Program number(BCD4 digits) 1 1 0 0 0 ×××× search 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 0 to 9 1) External Pr
Page 564B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 [Classification] Input signal [Function] The signals indicate the type of the entered data. Read signal for external data input ESTB [Classification] Input signal [Function] The signal reports
Page 56515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F060 ESEND EREND Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 PSR [Data type] Bit typ
Page 566B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH General When several part programs are stored in program storage memory, a program can be searched with the workpiece number search signals PN1 to PN16 from the machine side. When the cycle operation is actuated in the mem
Page 56715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Workpiece number search signal Workpiece PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 number 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 17 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 18 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 19 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 20 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 21 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 22 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 23 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 1 1
Page 568B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Note NOTE 1 This function can be used only in memory operation. It cannot be used during DNC operation and MDI operation. 2 Select the program number from O001 to O255. 3 Program numbers from O001 to O255 can be used. However, programs corresponding to all the
Page 56915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 15.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC General The PMC can control the speed and polarity of each spindle motor, connected by the optional spindle serial output/spindle analog output function. This section describes how to use the PMC to control spindle rotati
Page 570B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Specifying the output The PMC can specify the spindle motor output polarity when the polarity for the spindle following are executed: motor ⋅ Switching the controller from the CNC to the PMC, by issuing an SSIN signal ⋅ Specifying the output polarity to the SG
Page 57115. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 D Details of the signals D Signal used to select the spindle motor speed command SIND → The above signal is used to select whether the spindle motor speed is controlled by the CNC or PMC. 1: The spindle motor is controlled according to speed commands (R01I to
Page 572B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Twelve code signals corresponding to the S value R01O to R12O [Classification] Output signal [Function] The S value, specified in the CNC part program, is converted to the speed output to the spindle motor that is required to control the con
Page 57315. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3705 SFA NSF EVS ESF [Data type] Bit type ESF When the spindle control function (S analog output or S serial output) is used, and the constant surface speed control function is used or bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set
Page 574B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION 15.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT General MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation. Control is realized by exchanging the following i
Page 57515. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE Read processing is controlled by exclusive–ORing (XOR) the key code read signal (EKSET) with the read completion signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and EKENB signals differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once reading has been completed, the
Page 576B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal is on “1” while the CNC is displaying a program screen. Key code read completion signal EKENB [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signa
Page 57715. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 NOTE 1 0EDH is assigned to GRAPH/CUSTOM . 2 Handling of the soft keys [F0] to [F4], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the soft keys. They are associated with the MDI keys as shown below. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [FL] [F4] [F3] [F2] [F1] [F0
Page 578B–63173EN–1/01 15. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION MDI Key Code Table(00H–7FH) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Space 0 @ P 1 1 A Q 2 2 B R 3 # 3 C S 4 4 D T 5 5 E U 6 & 6 F V 7 7 G W 8 ( 8 H X 9 ) 9 I Y A ; * J Z (EOB) B + K [ C , L D – = M ] E . N F / ? O 565
Page 57915. PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 MDI Key Code Table(80H–0FFH) 8 9 A B C D E F 0 RESET [F0] (Note2) 1 [F1] (Note2) 2 [F2] (Note2) 3 [F3] (Note2) 4 INSERT [F4] (Note2) 5 DELETE 6 CAN ALTER 7 8 Cursor INPUT POS → 9 Cursor PROG ← OFFSET A Cursor HELP SET- ↓ TING B Cursor SYSTEM ↑ C MES- SAEG D GR
Page 580B–63173EN–1/01 16. TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL 16 TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL General If the Power Mate i detects a temporary interrupt, it resets this signal to 0 to stop axis movement. If the ladder program has been designed to set this signal to 1 when automatic operation is sta
Page 58117. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 17 TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION 568
Page 582B–63173EN–1/01 17. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION 17.1 Positioning can be performed by butting against a mechanical stop while applying a torque limit to the servo motor. OVERVIEW A torque limit can be set using three methods: parameter input, DI signal input, and input from the PMC. A torque limit set using
Page 58317. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Torque Control Function (1) Condition for activating this function Based on DI Signal Input This function is activated by turning the torque limit enable signal on when the torque control function based on parameter Torque limit enable input is disabl
Page 584B–63173EN–1/01 17. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION Torque Control Function (1) Condition for activating this function Based on Input From the This function is activated when both the torque control function based PMC on parameter input and the torque control function based on DI signal input are disabled. NOT
Page 58517. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION B–63173EN–1/01 Torque limit signal TRQn0 to TRQn7 [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal specifies a torque limit value for the axis for which the torque limit enable signal is 1. TRQ10 A torque limit value is set up as listed in Table 17.1 (b).
Page 586B–63173EN–1/01 17. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G223 TRQ77 TRQ76 TRQ75 TRQ74 TRQ73 TRQ72 TRQ71 TRQ70 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G224 TRQ87 TRQ86 TRQ85 TRQ84 TRQ83 TRQ82 TRQ81 TRQ80 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
Page 58718. V–READY WATING SIGNAL B–63173EN–1/01 18 V-READY WATING SIGNAL General If a function that disables an MCC–off servo alarm is in use, this signal indicates that the MCC is being awaited to become on. Signal V–READY waiting signal WVRDY [Classification] Output signal [Function] This signal
Page 588B–63173EN–1/01 18. V–READY WATING SIGNAL Alarm and message Number Message Contents 401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH The n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo amplifier AXIS VRDY OFF READY signal (DRDY) went off. Refer to procedure of trouble shooting. 575
Page 58919. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL B–63173EN–1/01 19 HANDY OPERATOR'S PANEL General A Handy Operator’s Panel can be connected as a display unit. Information entered by pressing the keys on the Handy Operator’s Panel is output to the PMC. The Handy Operator’s Panel has nine LEDs. Handy Operator’s Panel The h
Page 590B–63173EN–1/01 19 HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL Restrictions When the handy operator’s panel is being used, some restrictions are imposed on the Power Mate CNC functions, as described below. (1) For CRT display language selection, Japanese cannot be selected with bit 0 (JPN) of parameter No. 3102. Other la
Page 59119. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL B–63173EN–1/01 Handy operator’s panel key output signal SWn [Classification] Output signal [Function] Each of these signals indicates what key is pressed on the Handy Operator’s Panel. [Output condition] Each signal is 0 if: – The Handy Operator’s Panel is i
Page 592B–63173EN–1/01 19 HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL Handy operator’s panel LED control signal LED01 to LED09 [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal controls whether to turn on or off the LEDs on the Handy Operator’s Panel. [Operation] If the signal becomes 0, the control unit: – Tu
Page 59319. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL B–63173EN–1/01 Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01 G0205 LED09 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 F0169 SW16 SW15 M-OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW9 F0170 SW24 SW23 SW22 SW21 SW20 SW19 SW18 SW17
Page 594B–63173EN–1/01 19 HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL Key type and corresponding signal D Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R) 581
Page 59519. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL B–63173EN–1/01 D Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S) 582
Page 596B–63173EN–1/01 19 HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL LED and correspondig signal D Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) T–STEP T–JOG AUTO (LED02) ALARM G205 (LED09) 1: The corresponding LED is turned on. 0: The corresponding LED is turned off. D Symbolic
Page 59719. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL B–63173EN–1/01 Reference item CONNECTION MANUAL 7.11 CONNECTION TO THE HANDY OP- (HARDWARE) ERATOR’S PANEL (B–63174EN) 584
Page 598B–63173EN–1/01 20. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT 20 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT 585
Page 59920. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT B–63173EN–1/01 20.1 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT FUNCTION General This function is responsible for instigating motion along an arbitrary axis in phase with an external pulse signal entered from the machine. Enter an external pulse signal via the position coder interface. Position co
Page 600B–63173EN–1/01 20. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT NOTE 1 Machine lock, interlock, and overtravel are valid for axis movement based on external pulses. 2 For external pulse–based axis movement, acceleration/ deceleration must be an exponential type, and the time constant must be specified using parameter No. 1
Page 60120. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT B–63173EN–1/01 Position coder interface valid EPCON + direction movement – direction movement command pulse command pulse External pulse signal input PA PB Pulse count in the + pulse Power Mate – pulse Fig.20 (b) Sequence Signal External pulse input interface select signal E
Page 602B–63173EN–1/01 20. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT Code signals A, B, C, and D correspond to the feed axes as listed in the following table: Manual handle feed axis selection Feed axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA 0 0 0 0 No selection (None of axis is fed) 0 0 0 1 1st axis 0 0 1 0 2nd axis 0 0 1 1 3rd axis 0 1 0 0 4th
Page 60320. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT B–63173EN–1/01 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 7670 EXH [Data type] Byte EXH 0 : Sets an axis and magnification for external pulse input by using DI signals 1 : Sets an axis and magnification for external pulse input by using parameters 7681 Setting 1 of the ratio of an ax
Page 604APPENDI
Page 605B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC 593
Page 606A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES A.1.1 The address relationships between the Power Mate i–D/H and PMC Power Matei–MODEL interface signals are shown below. D/H List of Addresses G000~ X000~/X1000~ CNC PMC MT (%QC00001~) (%I00001~ /%IB00001~) F000~ Y000~/Y1000~ (%I
Page 607B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC → Address Bit No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1#D *ESP ESKIP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 X001 *DEC2#D X002 *DEC8#H *DEC7#H *DEC6#H *DEC5#H *DEC4#H *DEC3#H *DEC2#H *DEC1#H X003 When built–in DI is used X1000 SKIP *RILK *DEC1#D *ESP ESKIP SK
Page 608A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 → Address Bit No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 G003 G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN G005 AFL TFIN SFIN#D MFIN G006 SKIPP OVC *ABSM G007 RLSOT
Page 609B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G030 SOV7#D SOV6#D SOV5#D SOV4#D SOV3#D SOV2#D SOV1#D SOV0#D G031 G032 R08I#D R07I#D R06I#D R05I#D R04I#D R03I#D R02I#D R01I#D G033 SIND#D SSIN#D SGN#D R12I#D R11I#D R10I#D R09I#D G034 G035 G036 G037 G038 G039 G040 G041 HS2ID#H
Page 610A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G060 G061 RGTAP#D G062 G063 G064 G065 G066 EKSET EPCON ENBKY IGNVRY G067 G068 G069 G070 MRDYA#D ORCMA#D SFRA#D SRVA#D CTH1A#D CTH2A#D TLMHA#D TLMLA#D G071 RCHA#D RSLA#D INTGA#D SOCNA#D MCFNA#D SPSLA#D *ESPA#D ARSTA#D G072 RCHHGA
Page 611B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G090 G091 G092 G093 G094 G095 G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0 G097 G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0 G099 G100 +J8#H +J7#H +J6#H +J5#H +J4#H +J3#H +J2 +J1 G101 G102 –J8#H –J7#H –J6#H –J5#H –
Page 612A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G120 G121 G122 G123 G124 DTCH8#H DTCH7#H DTCH6#H DTCH5#H DTCH4#H DTCH3#H DTCH2 DTCH1 G125 G126 SVF8#H SVF7#H SVF6#H SVF5#H SVF4#H SVF3#H SVF2 SVF1 G127 G128 G129 G130 *IT8#H *IT7#H *IT6#H *IT5#H *IT4#H *IT3#H *IT2 *IT1 G131 G132
Page 613B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G152 G153 G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB ELCKZB EFINB G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF
Page 614A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G180 EIF7D#H EIF6D#H EIF5D#H EIF4D#H EIF3D#H EIF2D#H EIF1D#H EIF0D#H G181 EIF15D#H EIF14D#H EIF13D#H EIF12D#H EIF11D#H EIF10D#H EIF9D#H EIF8D#H G182 EID7D#H EID6D#H EID5D#H EID4D#H EID3D#H EID2D#H EID1D#H EID0D#H G183 EID15D#H E
Page 615B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G210 ZR8#H ZR7#H ZR6#H ZR5#H ZR4#H ZR3#H ZR2 ZR1 G211 ZPEXT8#H ZPEXT7#H ZPEXT6#H ZPEXT5#H ZPEXT4#H ZPEXT3#H ZPEXT2 ZPEXT1 G212 ACT RTNT#D GST#D G213 G214 G215 G216 TRQ8E#H TRQ7E#H TRQ6E#H TRQ5E#H TRQ4E#H TRQ3E#H TRQ2E TRQ1E G217
Page 616A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G240 G241 G242 G243 G244 G245 G246 G247 G248 G249 G250 G251 G252 G253 G254 G255 G256 G257 G258 G259 G260 G261 G262 G263 G264 G265 G266 G267 G268 G269 604
Page 617B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G270 G271 G272 G273 G274 G275 G276 G277 G278 G279 G280 G281 G282 G283 G284 G285 G286 G287 G288 G289 G290 G291 G292 G293 G294 G295 G296 G297 G298 G299 605
Page 618A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G300 G301 G302 G303 G304 G305 G306 G307 G308 G309 G310 G311 G312 G313 G314 G315 G316 G317 G318 G319 G320 G321 G322 G323 G324 G325 G326 G327 G328 G329 606
Page 619B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G330 G331 G332 G333 G334 G335 G336 G337 G338 G339 G340 G341 G342 G343 G344 G345 G346 G347 G348 G349 G350 G351 G352 G353 G354 G355 G356 G357 G358 G359 607
Page 620A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G360 G361 G362 G363 G364 G365 G366 G367 G368 G369 G370 G371 G372 G373 G374 G375 G376 G377 G378 G379 G380 G381 G382 G383 G384 G385 G386 G387 G388 G389 608
Page 621B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G390 G391 G392 G393 G394 G395 G396 G397 G398 G399 G400 G401 G402 G403 G404 G405 G406 G407 G408 G409 G410 G411 G412 G413 G414 G415 G416 G417 G418 G419 609
Page 622A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G420 G421 G422 G423 G424 G425 G426 G427 G428 G429 G430 G431 G432 G433 G434 G435 G436 G437 G438 G439 G440 G441 G442 G443 G444 G445 G446 G447 G448 G449 610
Page 623B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G450 G451 G452 G453 G454 G455 G456 G457 G458 G459 G460 G461 G462 G463 G464 EBUFE#H ECLRE#H ESTPE#H ESOFE#H ESBKE#H EMBUFE#H ELCKZE#H EFINE#H G465 EMSBKE#H EC6E#H EC5E#H EC4E#H EC3E#H EC2E#H EC1E#H EC0E#H G466 EIF7E#H EIF6E#H EIF
Page 624A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G480 EID7F#H EID6F#H EID5F#H EID4F#H EID3F#H EID2F#H EID1F#H EID0F#H G481 EID15F#H EID14F#H EID13F#H EID12F#H EID11F#H EID10F#H EID9F#H EID8F#H G482 EID23F#H EID22F#H EID21F#H EID20F#H EID19F#H EID18F#H EID17F#H EID16F#H G483 EI
Page 625B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G510 G511 613
Page 626A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 → Address Bit No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD F001 MA TAP#D ENB#D DEN BAL RST AL F002 CUT CSS#D F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MRMT MMDI MJ MSTP F004 MZRN F005 F006 F007 TF SF#D MF F008 MF3 MF2 F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30 F010 M07 M06 M0
Page 627B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F030 F031 F032 F033 F034 GR3O#D GR2O#D GR1O#D F035 F036 R08O#D R07O#D R06O#D R05O#D R04O#D R03O#D R02O#D R01O#D F037 R12O#D R11O#D R10O#D R09O#D F038 F039 F040 F041 F042 F043 F044 F045 ORARA#D TLMA#D LDT2A#D LDT1A#D SARA SDTA SS
Page 628A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F060 ESEND EREND F061 F062 PRTSF F063 F064 F065 RGSPM#D RGSPP#D F066 F067 F068 F069 F070 PSW08 PSW07 PSW06 PSW05 PSW04 PSW03 PSW02 PSW01 F071 PSW10 PSW09 F072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0 F073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O F074
Page 629B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F090 ABTSP1#D ABTQSV F091 F092 F093 F094 ZP8#H ZP7#H ZP6#H ZP5#H ZP4#H ZP3#H ZP2 ZP1 F095 F096 ZP28#H ZP27#H ZP26#H ZP25#H ZP24#H ZP23#H ZP22 ZP21 F097 F098 ZP38#H ZP37#H ZP36#H ZP35#H ZP34#H ZP33#H ZP32 ZP31 F099 F100 F101 F102
Page 630A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F120 ZRF8#H ZRF7#H ZRF6#H ZRF5#H ZRF4#H ZRF3#H ZRF2 ZRF1 F121 F122 F123 F124 F125 F126 F127 F128 F129 *EAXSL EOV0 F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA F131 EABUFA EMFA F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM1
Page 631B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F150 F151 EM48D#H EM44D#H EM42D#H EM41D#H EM38D#H EM34D#H EM32D#H EM31D#H F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1 F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 S
Page 632A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F180 CLRCH8#HCLRCH7#HCLRCH6#HCLRCH5#HCLRCH4#HCLRCH3#H CLRCH2 CLRCH1 F181 F182 EACNT8#H EACNT7#H EACNT6#H EACNT5#H EACNT4#H EACNT3#H EACNT2 EACNT1 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F190 TRQM8#H TRQM7#H TRQM6#H TRQM5#H TRQM4#H TR
Page 633B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F210 F211 F212 F213 F214 F215 F216 F217 F218 F219 F220 SUP8#H SUP7#H SUP6#H SUP5#H SUP4#H SUP3#H SUP2 SUP1 F221 IPL8#H IPL7#H IPL6#H IPL5#H IPL4#H IPL3#H IPL2 IPL1 F222 SVER8#HSVER7#HSVER6#HSVER5#HSVER4#HSVER3#H SVER2 SVER1 F223
Page 634A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F240 APBL5#H APBV5#H APBZ5#H APPS5#H APPE5#H APFE5#H APOV5#H APCM5#H F241 APBL6#H APBV6#H APBZ6#H APPS6#H APPE6#H APFE6#H APOV6#H APCM6#H F242 APBL7#H APBV7#H APBZ7#H APPS7#H APPE7#H APFE7#H APOV7#H APCM7#H F243 APBL8#H APBV8#H
Page 635B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F270 F271 F272 F273 F274 F275 F276 F277 F278 F279 F280 F281 F282 F283 F284 F285 F286 F287 F288 F289 F290 F291 F292 F293 F294 F295 F296 F297 F298 F299 F300 623
Page 636A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F301 F302 F303 F304 F305 F306 F307 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 F316 F317 F318 F319 F320 F321 F322 F323 F324 F325 F326 F327 F328 F329 F330 F331 624
Page 637B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F332 F333 F334 F335 F336 F337 F338 F339 F340 F341 F342 F343 F344 F345 F346 F347 F348 F349 F350 F351 F352 F353 F354 F355 F356 F357 F358 F359 F360 F361 F362 625
Page 638A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F363 F364 F365 F366 F367 F368 F369 F370 F371 F372 F373 F374 F375 F376 F377 F378 F379 F380 F381 F382 F383 F384 F385 F386 F387 F388 F389 F390 F391 F392 F393 626
Page 639B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F394 F395 F396 F397 F398 F399 F400 F401 F402 F403 F404 F405 F406 F407 F408 F409 F410 F411 F412 F413 F414 F415 F416 F417 F418 F419 F420 F421 F422 F423 F424 627
Page 640A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F425 F426 F427 F428 F429 F430 F431 F432 F433 F434 F435 F436 F437 F438 F439 F440 F441 F442 F443 F444 F445 F446 F447 F448 F449 F450 F451 F452 F453 F454 F455 628
Page 641B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F456 F457 F458 F459 F460 F461 F462 F463 F464 F465 F466 F467 F468 F469 F470 F471 F472 F473 F474 F475 F476 F477 F478 F479 F480 F481 F482 F483 F484 F485 F486 629
Page 642A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F487 F488 F489 F490 F491 F492 F493 F494 F495 F496 EM48E#H EM44E#H EM42E#H EM41E#H EM38E#H EM34E#H EM32E#H EM31E#H F497 EM48F#H EM44F#H EM42F#H EM41F#H EM38F#H EM34F#H EM32F#H EM31F#H F498 EM48G#H EM44G#H EM42G#H EM41G#H EM38G#H
Page 643B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.2 SIGNAL SUMMARY A.2.1 Signal Summary f : Available – : Unavailable (In Order of Functions) Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence External read start signal EXRD G058#1 f f External punch start signal EXWT G058#3 f f External
Page 644A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence *IT G008#0 f f Interlock signal for all axes X000#6 f f *RILK X1000#6 f f Interlock signal 25 2.5 Interlock signal for each axis *IT1 to *IT8 G130 f f +MIT1 to +MIT8 G132 f f Interlock signa
Page 645B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Data signals for external data ED0 to ED15 G000,G001 f f input Address signals for external EA0 to EA6 G002#0 to #6 f f data input Read signal for external data External data input ESTB G002
Page 646A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Miscellaneous function MFIN G005#0 f f completion signal Spindle function completion SFIN G005#2 f – signal High–speed M/S/T/B Tool function completion TFIN G005#3 f f 8.4 interface signal 2
Page 647B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Torque limit command LOW TLMLA G070#0 f – signals (serial spindle) Torque limit command HIGH TLMHA G070#1 f – signals (serial spindle) Clutch/gear signals (serial CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2 f – s
Page 648A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Differential speed mode command signals (serial DEFMDA G072#3 f – spindle) Analog override signals OVRIDA G072#4 f – (serial spindle) Incremental command externally set orientation INCMDA G0
Page 649B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Spindle serial Output switch completion output/spindle analog RCFNA F046#3 f – signals (serial spindle) output Subordinate operation status SLVSA F046#4 f – signals (serial spindle) Position
Page 650A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Manual reference position ZRN G043#7 f f return selection signal Manual reference position MZRN F004#5 f f return selection check signal X000#5 f – *DEC1 X1000#5 f – X001#5 f – Manual refere
Page 651B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Software operator’s panel MD1O F073#0 f f signal (MD1) Software operator’s panel MD2O F073#1 f f signal (MD2) Software operator’s panel MD4O F073#2 f f signal (MD4) Software operator’s panel
Page 652A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Software operator’s panel MLKO F075#4 f f signal (MLK) Software operator’s panel DRNO F075#5 f f signal (DRN) Software operator’s panel Software operator’s KEYO F075#6 f f signals (KEY1 to K
Page 653B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Manual reference position ZRN G043#7 f f return selection signal Manual reference position MZRN F004#5 f f return selection check signal +J1 to +J8 G100 f f Feed axis direction select signal
Page 654A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EIF0A to EIF15A G144,G145 f f EIF0B to EIF15B G156,G157 f f EIF0C to EIF15C G168,G169 – f EIF0D to EIF15D G180,G181 – f Axis control feedrate signals (PMC axis control) EIF0E to EIF15E G466,
Page 655B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence ECLRA G142#6 f f ECLRB G154#6 f f ECLRC G166#6 – f ECLRD G178#6 – f Reset signals (PMC axis control) ECLRE G464#6 – f ECLRF G476#6 – f ECLRG G488#6 – f ECLRH G500#6 – f ESTPA G142#5 f f ESTP
Page 656A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EM11A to EM48A F132,F142 f f EM11B to EM48B F135,F145 f f EM11C to EM48C F138,F148 – f Auxiliary function code EM11D to EM48D F141,F151 – f signals (PMC axis control) EM11E to EM48E F502,F49
Page 657B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EMBUFA G142#2 f f EMBUFB G154#2 f f EMBUFC G166#2 – f EMBUFD G178#2 – f Buffering disable signals (PMC axis control) EMBUFE G464#2 – f EMBUFF G476#2 – f EMBUFG G488#2 – f EMBUFH G500#2 – f C
Page 658A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EIALA F130#2 f f EIALB F133#2 f f EIALC F136#2 – f EIALD F139#2 – f Alarm signals (PMC axis control) EIALE F500#2 – f EIALF F503#2 – f EIALG F506#2 – f EIALH F509#2 – f EGENA F130#4 f f EGEN
Page 659B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EOTPA F130#5 f f EOTPB F133#5 f f EOTPC F136#5 – f EOTPD F139#5 – f Positive direction overtravel Positive–direction signals (PMC axis control) EOTPE F500#5 – f EOTPF F503#5 – f EOTPG F506#5
Page 660A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence ELCKZA G142#1 f f ELCKZB G154#1 f f ELCKZC G166#1 – f ELCKZD G178#1 – f Following zero checking signals (PMC axis control) ELCKZE G464#1 – f PMC axis control 15.1 ELCKZF G476#1 – f ELCKZG G4
Page 661B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Miscellaneous function code M00 to M31 F010 to F013 f f signals Miscellaneous function strobe MF F007#0 f f signal DM00 F009#7 f f DM01 F009#6 f f Decode M signals DM02 F009#5 f f Miscellane
Page 662A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Function Signal name Symbol Address PM i–D PM i–H ence MMDI F003#3 f f MAUT F003#5 f f MRMT F003#4 f – MEDT F003#6 f f Mode selection Operation mode check signal 26 2.6 MSTP F003#1 f f MJ F003#2 f f MZRN F004#5 f f MTCHIN F003#7 f f Rigid tappin
Page 663B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC A.2.2 List of Signals f : Available – : Unavailable (In Order of Symbols) Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence *+L1 to *+L8 G114 f f Overtravel signals 231 2.3.1 *–L1 to *–L8 G116 f f *ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 f f 5.4 X000#5 f
Page 664A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Feed axis and direction selection signals 3.1 +J1 to +J8 G100 f f Feed axis direction select signal 4.2 Software operator’s panel signals F081#0,#2,#4, +J1O to +J4O f f 12.1.10 (+J1 to +J4) #6 +LM1 t
Page 665B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence APCM1 to F236#0 to APC communication error signal f f APCM8 F243#0 2 12 2.12 F236#2 to APFE1 to APFE8 APC framing error signal f f F243#2 F236#1 to APOV1 to APOV8 APC over time error signal f f F243#
Page 666A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EABUFA F131#1 f f EABUFB F134#1 f f EABUFC F137#1 – f EABUFD F140#1 – f Buffer full signals (PMC axis control) 15 1 15.1 EABUFE F501#1 – f EABUFF F504#1 – f EABUFG F507#1 – f EABUFH F510#1 – f EACNT1
Page 667B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6 f f EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6 f f EC0C to EC6C G167#0 to #6 – f EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to #6 – f Axis control command signals 15 1 15.1 EC0E to EC6E (PMC axis control) G465#0 t
Page 668A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EDENA F130#3 f f EDENB F133#3 f f EDENC F136#3 – f EDEND F139#3 – f Auxiliary function executing signals (PMC axis 15 1 15.1 EDENE control) F500#3 – f EDENF F503#3 – f EDENG F506#3 – f EDENH F509#3 –
Page 669B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149 f f EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161 f f EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173 – f EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185 – f Axis control data signals 15 1 15.1 EID0E to EID31E (PMC axis contr
Page 670A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence ELCKZA G142#1 f f ELCKZB G154#1 f f ELCKZC G166#1 – f ELCKZD G178#1 – f Following zero checking signals (PMC axis control) 15 1 15.1 ELCKZE G464#1 – f ELCKZF G476#1 – f ELCKZG G488#1 – f ELCKZH G500#
Page 671B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EMSBKA G143#7 f f EMSBKB G155#7 f f EMSBKC G167#7 – f EMSBKD G179#7 – f Block sto stop disable signals 15 1 15.1 EMSBKE (PMC axis control) G465#7 – f EMSBKF G477#7 – f EMSBKG G489#7 – f EMSBKH G501#7
Page 672A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence EOTPA F130#5 f f EOTPB F133#5 f f EOTPC F136#5 – f EOTPD F139#5 – f Positive direction overtravel signals (PMC axis Positive–direction 15 1 15.1 EOTPE control) F500#5 – f EOTPF F503#5 – f EOTPG F506#
Page 673B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence ESTPA G142#5 f f ESTPB G154#5 f f ESTPC G166#5 – f ESTPD G178#5 – f Axis control temporary tem orary stop sto signals (PMC axis 15 1 15.1 ESTPE control) G464#5 – f ESTPF G476#5 – f ESTPG G488#5 – f E
Page 674A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence Incremental command externally set orientation INCMDA G072#5 f – 9.2 signals (serial spindle) INCSTA Incremental orientation mode signals (serial spindle) F047#1 f – 9.2 Orientation stop position cha
Page 675B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence MFIN2 2nd M function completion signal G004#4 f f 84 8.4 MFIN3 3rd M function completion signal G004#5 f f Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact status signals MFNHGA G072#6 f – 9.2 (serial spindle) MI1 to
Page 676A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence OP Automatic operation signal F000#7 f f 5.1 Orientation completion signals ORARA F045#7 f – 9.2 (serial spindle) ORCMA Orientation command signals (serial spindle) G070#6 f – 9.2 Software operator’s
Page 677B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override signals G014#0,#1 f f 7.1.5.1 ROV1E,ROV2E Rapid traverse override signals (PMC axis control) G150#0,#1 f f 15.1 ROV1O Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1) F076#4
Page 678A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Symbol Signal name Address PM i–D PM i–H ence SFIN Spindle function completion signal G005#2 f – 8.4 SFRA CW command signals (serial spindle) G070#5 f – 9.2 SGN Spindle motor command polarity command signals G033#5 f – 15.4 Spindle orientation e
Page 679
Page 680A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 A.2.3 List of Signals f : Available – : Unavailable (In Order of Addresses) Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence X000#0 to #2 Skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP4 f f 14.2.2 X000#3 Skip signal (PMC axis control) ESKIP f f 15.1 X000#4 Emergency s
Page 681B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence G006#4 Override cancel signal OVC f f 7.1.7.4 14.2.1 G006#6 Skip signals SKIPP f f 14.2.2 G007#2 Cycle start signal ST f f 5.1 G007#5 Follow–up signal *FLWU f f 1.2.7 G007#7 Stroke check release sign
Page 682A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence G033#7 Spindle motor speed command selection signal SIND f – 15.4 G041#0 to #3 Manual handle interrupt axis selection signals HS1IA to HS1ID f f 3.3 G041#4 to #7 Manual handle interrupt axis selectio
Page 683B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence G070#6 Orientation command signals (serial spindle) ORCMA f – 9.2 G070#7 Machine ready signals (serial spindle) MRDYA f – 9.2 G071#0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTA f – 9.2 G071#1 Emergenc
Page 684A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Feed axis and direction selection signals 3.1 G100 +J1 to +J8 f f Feed axis direction select signal 4.2 Feed axis and direction selection signals 3.1 G102 –J1 to –J8 f f Feed axis direction select si
Page 685B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Axis control data signals G146 to G149 EID0A to EID31A f f 15.1 (PMC axis control) G150#0,#1 Rapid traverse override signals (PMC axis control) ROV1E,ROV2E f f 15.1 Override cancellation signal G150#
Page 686A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Axis control command read signals (PMC axis G166#7 EBUFC – f 15.1 control) Axis control command signals G167#0 to #6 EC0C to EC6C – f 15.1 (PMC axis control) Block stop disable signals G167#7 EMSBKC
Page 687B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Rigid tapping retraction start signal 5.8 G212#6 RTNT f – Tapping retraction start signal 5.9 G212#7 Temporary interrupt detection signal ACT f f 16 G216 Torque limit enable signals TRQ1E to TRQ8E f
Page 688A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Block stop disable signals G477#7 EMSBKF – f 15.1 (PMC axis control) Axis control feedrate signals G478,G479 EIF0F to EIF15F – f 15.1 (PMC axis control) Axis control data signals G480 to G483 EID0F t
Page 689B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Block stop disable signals G501#7 EMSBKH – f 15.1 (PMC axis control) Axis control feedrate signals G502,G503 EIF0H to EIF15H – f 15.1 (PMC axis control) Axis control data signals G504 to G507 EID0H t
Page 690A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Spindle function strobe signal 8.1 F007#2 SF f – Spindle–speed function strobe signal 9.5.4.2 F007#3 Tool function strobe signal TF f f 8.1 F008#4 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 f f 83 8.3 F008#5 3
Page 691B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Position coder orientation proximity signal (serial F046#5 PORA2A f – 9.2 spindle) Magnetic sensor orientation completion signals F046#6 MORA1A f – (serial spindle) 92 9.2 Magnetic sensor orientation
Page 692A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence F075#7 Software operator’s panel signal (*SP) *SPO f f 12.1.10 F076#0 Software operator’s panel signal (MP1) MP1O f f 12 1 10 12.1.10 F076#1 Software operator’s panel signal (MP2) MP2O f f F076#3 Rig
Page 693B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Control axis selection status signals (PMC axis F129#7 *EAXSL f f 15.1 control) F130#0 In–position signals (PMC axis control) EINPA f f 15.1 F130#1 Following zero checking signals (PMC axis control)
Page 694A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence F136#2 Alarm signals (PMC axis control) EIALC – f 15.1 Auxiliary function executing signals (PMC axis F136#3 EDENC – f 15.1 control) F136#4 Axis moving signals (PMC axis control) EGENC – f 15.1 Posit
Page 695B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence TRQM1 to F190 Torque control mode signal (PMC axis control) f f 15.1 TRQM8 F209#4 V–READY waiting signal WVRDY f f 18 Rigid tapping retraction completion signal 5.8 F209#5 RTPT f – Tapping retraction
Page 696A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC B–63173EN–1/01 Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence F500#1 Following zero checking signals (PMC axis control) ECKZE – f 15.1 F500#2 Alarm signals (PMC axis control) EIALE – f 15.1 Auxiliary function executing signals (PMC axis F500#3 EDENE – f 15.1 co
Page 697B–63173EN–1/01 A. INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC Refer- Address Signal name Symbol PM i–D PM i–H ence Negative–direction overtravel signals F506#6 EOTNG – f 15.1 (PMC axis control) Axis control command read completion signals (PMC F506#7 EBSYG – f 15.1 axis control) F507#0 Auxiliary function strobe s
Page 698B–63173EN–1/01 Index Ơ Numbers ơ Displaying alarm history, 441 Displaying operation history, 439 2nd or 4th reference position return, 185 DNC operation, 226 Dry run, 215 Ơ Aơ Abnormal load detection, 118 ƠEơ Absolute position detection, 41 Edit, 474 Acceleration/deceleration control, 263 Emergency
Page 699INDEX B–63173EN–1/01 ƠLơ ƠPơ Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, Parameters related to servo, 36 271 Part program storage length, 474 Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed interpolation, 279 Path selection/display of optional path names (two–path control
Page 700B–63173EN–1/01 INDEX Single block, 218 Temporary interrupt detection signal, 567 Skip function, 496 Testing a program, 213 Software operator’s panel, 450 Timing charts for rigid tapping specification, 369 Specifying G84 (G74) for rigid tapping by parameters, 378 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode,
Page 701Revision Record FANUCĄSeriesĄPower Mate i–MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B–63173EN–1) 01 Jun., ’97 Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents
Page 702ＦＡＮＵＣＰｏｗｅｒＭａｔｅ i－ＭＯＤＥＬＤ／Ｈ The function of assigning C executor’s screens to the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key. １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. Ｂ－６３１７３ＥＮ－１／０１ No./Version ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Corre
Page 703Add the following description as the section “11.6 11.6 C EXECUTOR”. EXECUTOR . 11.6 C EXECUTOR 11.6.1 General FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H C Executor enables to add the machine tool builder’s original screen into FANUC Power Mate and to customize screen displaying and operation interface of CNC sof
Page 70411.6.2 The function of assigning C executor’s screens to the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key C executor’s screens can be assigned to the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key by setting up the parameters CM1～3(No.8653#0～2) without Macro executor option. When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pushed, a user screen is displayed on the CRT.
Page 70511.6.3 Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8650 CNA RSK [Data type] Bit RSK Specifies whether the key code is transferred to application when a reset key is pushed 0: Not transferred. 1: Transferred. CNA Specifies whether the screen is changed to NC alarm screen when NC alarm is generated during the u
Page 706#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8653 CM3 CM2 CM1 [Data type] Bit CM1 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pushed, the user screen that was defined as CRT_USR_AUX 0: Is not displayed. 1: Is displayed. CM2 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pushed, the user screen that was defined as CRT_USR_MCR 0: Is not displayed. 1:
Page 7078661 Size of variable areas [Data type] Word [Unit of data] KByte [Valid data range] 0 to 59 Specify the size of the static variable areas that can be set by each task. Specify it by the unit of 1 KByte. The maximum size is 59 Kbytes. And the total value of a SRAM Disk size and this size should not
Page 7088781 Size of DRAM Disk [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 64 KBytes [Valid data range] 16 Specify the size of a DRAM used in C Executor. Always set the value 16. Because the usable size of DRAM is 1024 KBytes, which is constant for Power Mate. It is regarded as 0 in the case that the value is set out o
Page 709ＦＡＮＵＣＰｏｗｅｒＭａｔｅ i－ＭＯＤＥＬＤ／Ｈ The function of assigning C executor’s screens to the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key. １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H PARAMETER MANUAL Spec. Ｂ－６３１８０ＥＮ／０１ No./Version ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delet
Page 710In the section “4.31 OTHER PARAMETERS”, add or replace the explanation about parameters as follows. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8650 CNA RSK [Data type] Bit RSK Specifies whether the key code is transferred to application when a reset key is pushed 0: Not transferred. 1: Transferred. CNA Specifies wheth
Page 711#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8653 CM3 CM2 CM1 [Data type] Bit CM1 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pushed, the user screen that was defined as CRT_USR_AUX 0: Is not displayed. 1: Is displayed. CM2 When the [CUSTOM/GRAPH] key is pushed, the user screen that was defined as CRT_USR_MCR 0: Is not displayed. 1:
Page 7128661 Size of variable areas [Data type] Word [Unit of data] KByte [Valid data range] 0 to 59 Specify the size of the static variable areas that can be set by each task. Specify it by the unit of 1 KByte. The maximum size is 59 Kbytes. And the total value of a SRAM Disk size and this size should not
Page 7138781 Size of DRAM Disk [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] 64 KBytes [Valid data range] 16 Specify the size of a DRAM used in C Executor. Always set the value 16. Because the usable size of DRAM is 1024 KBytes, which is constant for Power Mate. It is regarded as 0 in the case that the value is set out o
Page 714TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN99/100E Date 1999. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) １．Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder Sales
Page 715FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate I-MODEL D/H SPECIFICATION MANUAL Spec. B-63172EN/01 No./Version 2. Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Development of Po
Page 716FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) SPECIFICATIOIN MANUAL (CONTENTS) Stored pitch error compensation function 3 Straightness compensation B function 4 TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) Specification manual DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 99
Page 717Stored Pitch error compensation function is applied to the following system series and version or later of the Power Mate i series. Power Mate i series type ＲＯＭ series version FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H ８８Ｆ０ 07 Please change the contents of the explanation in the following manual with the adding of
Page 718Straightness Compensation B function is applied to the following system series and version or later of the Power Mate i-D/H. Power Mate i series type ＲＯＭ series version FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D ８８Ｅ０ 07 FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H ８８Ｆ０ 07 Please add the following explanation in the following manual
Page 719FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION Name MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Developmen
Page 720FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) (CONTENTS) External I/O device control, data input/output functions based on the I/O Link(slave) 3 Addition of the parameter which makes it impossible to use a manual handle in JOG mode(supplement) 12
Page 7211.The explanation of the 13.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL of FANUC Power Mate i- MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) is partly added. The part program, parameter, variable, diagnose data registering/outputting operation by the I/O device is possible by using external signals. 1.1 The followings a
Page 722Macro variable selection signal EVAR [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal turns to “1”, the CNC acts as follows. ･Selects macro variables as I/O data. ･Inputting operation Macro variable data is input from the I/O device. Input condition: Set protection signal KEY2 to 1
Page 723･Outputting operation Specified number of data items are output to the I/O device from a specified start number in order from #100 to #199 and from #500 to #699. Specify the output start number of a macro variable in EDG0 to EDG15, and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to EDN15. Data o
Page 724Diagnostic data selection signal EDGN [Classification] Input signal [Function] When this signal turns to “1” , the CNC acts as follows. ･Selects diagnostic data as I/O data. ･Inputting operation Diagnostic data is input from the I/O device. (NOTE) Diagnostic data can be loaded into the PMC
Page 725For axis-type diagnostic data: N data number A1 P data A2 P data ; A : A value that follows A is output as an axis number. This applies only to axis-type diagnostic data. A1 = first-axis data; A2 = second-axis data For diagnostic data 0000 to 09999 20000+(diagnose number) For PMC address G0000 to 02
Page 726Signals indicating the number of data items to be output (punched) EDN0 to EDN15 [Classification] Input signal [Function] ･When diagnostic data or macro variable data is to be output, specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to EDN15 by using a 16-bit binary code. Setting EDG0
Page 7271.3 The followings are added in the G251, G252, G253, G254 and G255 in the APPENDIX A.1.1 Power Mate i-MODEL D/H List of Addresses. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EPRG IOLNK #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G253 EDG15
Page 7282. The followings are added before the 14 MEASUREMENT of FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION). 13.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTIONS BASED ON THE I/O LINK (SLAVE) General The input/output of the part program, parameters, macro variables and diagnostic data (PMC) is possible between t
Page 729IOLNK = 0 : Select the data input/output function by the RS-232-C. IOLNK = 1 : Select the data input/output function by the FANUC I/O Link. IOLNK=0 RS-232-C I/O device Power Mate IOLNK=1 FANUC I/O Link Master CNC Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G251 IOLNK TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H External
Page 730Replace the description of "Note" in the section "3.1 JOG FEED/ STEP FEED" with the following. Note NOTE 1. Both manual handle and incremental feed are enabled in the manual handle feed mode. 2. When the parameter NJH(No.7104#6) is 0, the manual handle feed is effective in the JOG mode. If it should
Page 731Add following description after “12.1.12 Periodic Maintenance Screen”. 12.1.13 Switching Key Codes General Key codes(M or T) can be switched to fit the key code of CRT/MDI by parameter. When CRT/MDI is used commonly by Power Mate i and another kinds of CNC, MDI key can be continued to be used. （exam
Page 732Please add [21. ANALOG INPUT] and [21.1 Analog input function] after [20. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT FUNCTION] , and add also the following description. Outline By this function, the analog input(-10V to 10V) can be converted into digital data so that PMC can perform various kind of control with it. Power
Page 733Signal Analog input signal [Section] Output signal AD00 to AD12, [Function] The analog input signal from an external device is converted into ADSGN digital data and output with these signals. Output signal consists of fourteen bits from AD00 to AD12, and negative value is expressed in tw
Page 734【Maximum voltage】【Minimum voltage】 1FFC = 8188 The value in two’s complement is The value in voltage is as as follows. follows. E000H = -8192 8188 × 10 V ≅ 10 . 00 V The value in voltage is as follows. 2 13 10 V − 8192 × ≅ − 10 . 00 V 2 13 [Operation] When analog voltage is given from an external d
Page 7358730 Compensation value of voltage [Data type] Word type 10V [Data unit] ≅ 1 .22 × 10 − 3 V 2 13 [Valid range] 0 to ±8191 When analog input is 0 volts, set the value of this parameter to compensate the diagnostic No.833 to 0. Diagnostic screen 833 Voltage from the analog input module after compensat
Page 736Please modify items of F206 and F207 in [A.1.1 Power Mate i –MODEL D/H ADDRESS LIST] of [APPENDIX A Interface between CNC and PMC] as the following. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F206 AD05 AD04 AD03 AD02 AD01 AD00 0 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F207 ADSGN AD12 AD11 AD10 AD09 AD08 AD07 AD06 Please add the fol
Page 737Replace the description in "General" in "12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length" of FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H Connection Manual (Function) (B-63173JA-1/01) as follows. 12.2.1 Part Program Storage Length General One of the following part program length can be selected. P o we r Ma t e i - D ( m ) 10
Page 738Stored Pitch Error Compensation function is applied to the following system series and version or later of the Power Mate i series. Power Mate i series type ＲＯＭ series version FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H ８８Ｆ０ 07 Please change the contents of the explanation in the following manual with the adding of
Page 739Replace a column of F248 in ”A.1.1 Power Mate i-MODEL D/H List of addresses” with a following description. F248 FANAL2 FANAL1 Replace a column of alarm signal in “A.2.1 Signal summary (In Order of Function)” with a following description. Alarm signal AL F001#0 ○ ○ Alarm signal Battery alarm signal B
Page 740Add a following description in “2.4 ALARM SIGNAL” just after the description of “battery alarm. Fan alarm signal FANAL1, FANAL2＜F248#5, #6＞ [Classification] Output signal [Function] The fan alarm signal indicates that one of the fan coolers has stopped. [Output condition] The signal is set to 1 when
Page 741Add a following description after “7.2.8 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse”. 7.2.9 Expansion of time constant General In case that controlled axes are 1∼4, the maximum of time constants, such as exponential, bell-shaped or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed and in jog
Page 742Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1605 TCE [Data type] Bit TCE The function of the expansion of time constant is 0：not available(maximum Time constant is 8000) 1：available(maximum time constant depends on number of controlled axes) In case that this function is available, the range of the time const
Page 743Change description of [Valid data range] of parameter No.1622 and No.1624 in “7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration”, “7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation”, “7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation” and “7.2.7 Axis Status S
Page 744Straightness Compensation B function is applied to the following system series and version or later of the Power Mate i-D/H. Power Mate i series type ＲＯＭ series version FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D ８８Ｅ０ 07 FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H ８８Ｆ０ 07 Please add the following contents at the next part of the “1.
Page 745Parameter 5711 Axis number of moving axis 1 【Data type】 Byte 【Unit of data】 Axis number (When 0, compensation is not performed.) 【Valid data range】 1 to Number of controlled axes Set the axis numbers of moving axes. 5721 Axis number of compensation axis 1 for moving axis 1 【Data type】 Byte 【Unit of
Page 746Alarm and message Number Message Description 5046 ILLEGAL Parameter related to straightness compensation B PARAMETER have been erroneously specified. (ST.COMP B) Possible causes are as follows. 1. Invalid axis number have been assigned to move or compensation axes. 2. The number of pitch-error compe
Page 747"7.1.7 Look-ahead feed-forward control" is added. TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Look-ahead feed-forward control Connection manual (function) DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 990624 New design B-63173EN-1/02 SHEET EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION
Page 7487.1.7 Look-ahead feed-forward control General This function is designed for high-speed precise axis motion. With this function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be suppressed. The tool can then follow speci
Page 749Parameter 1431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode [Data type] Two-word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1mm/min 0∼240000 0∼100000 Inch machine 0.1inch/min 0∼96000 0∼48000
Page 750Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode. A feedrate for each axis is clamped during cutting feed so that it does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified for each axis. WARNING In a mode other than the look-ahead feed-forward control mo
Page 751＜ Example of a deceleration process ＞＜ Example of an acceleration process ＞ Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate after acceleration/ Feedrate after acceleration/ deceleration before deceleration before Point 1 interpolation is applied interpolation is applied F3 Type A F
Page 752Minimum speed in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed 1763 in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1mm/min 6∼15000 6∼12000 Inch machine 0.1i
Page 753Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration 1770 before interpolation in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode (maximum cutting speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Two-word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment syste
Page 754This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode. In this parameter, set the time (time constant) used to reach the speed set in parameter No.1770. NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1770 or paramete
Page 755Parameters for look-ahead feed-forward control mode and normal mode (Parameters for the cutting feed acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) Parameter No. Parameter description Look-ahead feed-forward Normal mode control mode Acceleration/deceleration type ( type A / type B ) FWB(1602#0) FWB
Page 756Note NOTE 1. In the look-ahead feed-forward control mode, the functions listed below cannot be specified. To specify these functions, it is necessary to cancel the look-ahead feed- forward control mode. After the desired function is completed, then set look-ahead feed-forward control mode again. ・Ri
Page 757Please add the next page as “chapter Function after “chapter chapter 21.Multi Axes Synchronization Function” chapter 20. Input in “Contents External Pulse Input” Contents”. Contents . TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Multi axes synchronization function Connection manual (function) DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 9906
Page 758MULTI AXES SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION ( Power Mate i-H only ) 1. SUMMARY....................................................................................................................................................... 42 2. PROCESS ................................................................
Page 759Please add the following description as “chapter chapter 21. Multi Axes Synchronization FunctionFunction” after “chapter chapter 20. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT”. INPUT . TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Multi axes synchronization function Connection manual (function) DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 990624 New design B-6317
Page 7601. Summary Power Mate i-MODEL H (described as “Power Mate i-H” in the following) has the Multi Axes Synchronization Function. This function is that one servo axis synchronizes another servo axis as these axis are connected mechanically. This synchro relation keeps continuously. You can flexibly set
Page 7613. Setting You set the synchro relation between synchronized axis(parent axis) and synchronizing axis(child axis) by parameters before you execute synchro motion. Don’t do this setting by G10 command. 3.1. Synchro axis setting You settle the synchro relation between parent axis and child one. Parent
Page 762(Example) The following is an example of synchro setting. Axis number X is equal to 1, and Y is 2. Parameter No.8380 Parent axis number Parameter No.8381 Parent axis category X 0 X 100 Y 1 Y 1 Z 0 Z 0 A 0 A 0 B 0 B 0 C 0 C 0 U 0 U 0 V 0 V 0 Concerning parameter No.8381, both X and Y are related to s
Page 7634. Motion This chapter shows the synchro motion according to the synchro relation previous chapter refers to. Synchro motion has done by NC command. 4.1. NC Command As for NC command, synchro motion is sure to be executed in “G91(incremental)” condition. it needs to select synchro mode by settin
Page 764It shows another example. X axis synchronizes Y axis. X axis moves one rotation while Y axis moves the same. X axis changes its speed by 2 stages. In Section 2, X axis moves 2 times faster than that in Section 1. X axis Y axis(parent of X) Section2 Section1 Beforehand, You set parameter No.8
Page 7655. Signal 5.1. Synchro mode signal #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G212 SYCMD synchro mode signal SYCMD [Division] Input Signal [Function] This signal shows whether synchro motion is enable or not. 1 : synchro mode on(synchro motion enable) 0 : synchro mode off(synchro motion disable) Be sure to set
Page 7666. Others 6.1. Note Don’t use acceleration or deceleration function to child axis in synchro motion to prevent incorrect synchronization. Overlap function in motion block is not valid when it is commanded next to synchro motion block. 6.2. Restriction The following function can’t be used in sync
Page 767Add a following description as “22 FANUC I/O Link function” after chapter 21. (1) OUTLINE The I/O Link is serial interface that transfers high speed I/O signals (bit data) between CNC and cell controllers and I/O Unit–A, Power Mate. When an Power Mate, an I/O Link β,= an I/O card, or an I/O unit is
Page 768(3) I/O DATA OPERATION I/O Link has 1024 input and 1024 output I/O points seen from the Master. There is a periodic transfer of I/O data between the master and slaves by allotting these input and output points to each slave. Master Slave #0 Output 1024 output Input points Slave #1 Output 1024 Input
Page 769Actual I/O points Dedicated I/O points Remarks Slave Input Output Input points Output points type points points I/O Number of Number of Actual I/O Dedicated I/O Unit–A points for points for points points each input each output module module A maximum of 256 input Less than 32→ 32 points and 256 outp
Page 770(4) CONNECTIONS Slave Master I/O Unit-A I/O Unit-A 10m 2m CNC Group F-D Mate #0 Power Mate 10m Power Group Mate #1 2m Optical adapter 200m Optical fiber cable Optical adapter 2m Group I/O Link β #2 10m I/O card Group #3 Group #15 (a) The maximum cable length between each unit and equipment is 10 m.
Page 771When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is used with Power Mate, the Power Mate functions as a master unit, and the I/O card, or the I/O unit functions as a slave unit. (5) SPECIFICATIONS LIST Item Specifications Remarks Equipment and Master: Power Mate–D/H/iD/iH units that can be connected Slave: I/O Unit
Page 772(8) I/O link slave area HOST DO → Power Mate DI (serial communication DI) Power Mate Bit No. PMC Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 X1020 SDI07 SDI06 SDI05 SDI04 SDI03 SDI02 SDI01 SDI00 X1021 SDI15 SDI14 SDI13 SDI12 SDI11 SDI10 SDI09 SDI08 X1022 SDI23 SDI22 SDI21 SDI20 SDI19 SDI18 SDI17 SDI16 X1023 SDI
Page 773FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec. No./Version B-63174EN/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Development of Power M
Page 774FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) OPERATOR’S MANUAL (CONTENTS) Addition of the parameter which makes it impossible to use a manual handle in JOG mode(supplement) 3 Stored pitch error compensation function 4 Countermeasure when fan cooler stopps 5 Look-ahead feed
Page 775Add the note to the last part of the section "3.2 JOG FEED" in the chapter "IV. OPERATION". Note When the parameter NJH(No.7104#6) is 0, the manual handle feed is effective in the JOG mode. If it should be ineffective in the JOG mode, set 1 to the parameter No.7104#6. TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Ad
Page 776Stored Pitch Error Compensation function is applied to the following system series and version or later of the Power Mate i series. Power Mate i series type ＲＯＭ series version FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H ８８Ｆ０ 07 Please change the contents of the explanation in the following manual with the adding of
Page 777Add a following description after the description of 976 in “System alarm” in “G. ALARM LIST”. 978 FAN OVER HEAT ALARM Both of the two fan coolers have stopped. Renew the fan coolers. TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Countermeasure when fan cooler stops Operator’s manual DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 990624 New des
Page 778"II.16.4 Look-ahead feed-forward control (G08)" is added. TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Look-ahead feed-forward control Operator’s manual DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 990624 New design B-63174EN/01 SHEET EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 6
Page 77916.4 Look-ahead This function is designed for high-speed precise axis motion. With this function, the feed-forward control delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the servo system which (G08) increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be suppressed. The tool can then follow specifie
Page 780• Functions that In the look-ahead feed-forward control mode, the functions listed below cannot be specified. cannot be specified. To specify these functions, it is necessary to cancel the look-ahead feed-forward control mode. After the desired function is completed, then set look-ahead feed-forward
Page 781FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H MAINTENANCE MANUAL Spec. No./Version B-63175EN/ 01 2. Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Development of Pow
Page 782FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) MAINTENANCE MANUAL (CONTENTS) Restore all system files(from memory card) 3 Countermeasure when fan cooler stopped 5 TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) Maintenance manual DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 990
Page 783Add the following description after the explanation " " in "2.2.1 OPERATION AT POWER ON " of FANUC Power Mate i-D,i-H Display of Power Mate i equipment and service operation Specification(B-63175JA/01). TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Restore all system files(from memory card) Maintenance manual DRAW.N
Page 784Restore all system files （from memory card））・All the system files are restored from a memory card at once. ・An alarm occurs when a write protect switch of a memory card is not on. （It is possible to restore them in the service operation of the boot system, too.）・Pushing the push switch after the
Page 785Add following description as “2.5.1 fan cooler” in “2.5 METHODS FOR DISMOUNTING AND MOUNTING FAN UNITS AND FANS”. And renumber the existing paragraph from 2.5.2. 2.5.1 Fan Cooler In order to avoid malfunction caused by overheat, Power Mate i has two fans. When one of the two fans stops, the warning
Page 786FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H PARAMETER MANUAL Spec. No./Version B-63180EN/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Development of Power Ma
Page 787FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP3) PARAMETER MANUAL (CONTENTS) The function that key matrix of MDI can be changed from M-type to T-type 3 The function of the expansion of time constant 4 Look-ahead feed-forward control 6 TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Development o
Page 788Add a following description after parameter No.3118 in “4.11 PARAMETERS OF MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT". #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3119 TKEY [Data type] Bit TKEY Using MDI key code is 0 : M type 1 : T type Note After setting this parameter, turn the power off then on again so that the setting will take eff
Page 789Add a following description after No.1602 in “4.8 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL” #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1605 TCE [Data type] Bit TCE The function of the expansion of time constant is 0：not available(maximum Time constant is 8000) 1：available(maximum time constant depends on number
Page 790Change description of [Valid data range] of parameter No.1622 in “4.8 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL” as follows. Don’t change the description, “Set the time constant ……” and the figure after [Valid data range]. [Valid data range] ・In case that the function of expansion of time cons
Page 791Following parameters are added. TITLE FANUC Power Mate i-D/H Look-ahead feed-forward control Parameter manual DRAW.NO. CUST. 01 990624 New design B-63180EN/01-4 SHEET EDIT DATE DESIG. DESCRIPTION 6
Page 7921431 Maximum cutting feedrate for all axes in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode [Data type] Two-word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1mm/min 0∼240000 0∼100000 Inch machine 0.1inch/min 0∼96000 0∼48000 Rotation
Page 793Specify the maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode. A feedrate for each axis is clamped during cutting feed so that it does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate specified for each axis. WARNING In a mode other than the look-ahead feed-forward control mo
Page 794＜ Example of a deceleration process ＞＜ Example of an acceleration process ＞ Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate after acceleration/ Feedrate after acceleration/ deceleration before deceleration before Point 1 interpolation is applied interpolation is applied F3 Type A F
Page 795Minimum speed in exponential acceleration/deceleration for cutting feed 1763 in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment system Unit of data [Valid data range] IS-A, IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1mm/min 6∼15000 6∼12000 Inch machine 0.1i
Page 796Parameter 1 for setting an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration 1770 before interpolation in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode (maximum cutting speed during linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation) [Data type] Two-word [Unit of data] Valid data range Increment syste
Page 797This parameter is used to set an acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation in the look-ahead feed-forward control mode. In this parameter, set the time (time constant) used to reach the speed set in parameter No.1770. NOTE 1 When 0 is set in parameter No.1770 or paramete
Page 798• This page is added to Contents. 1. OUTLINE............................................................................................................................................... 3 2. DIFFERENCE FROM THE TYPE A ................................................................................
Page 799• The following pages are newly added as “the section 22 Electronic CAM Function (type B)”. 1. Outline The cam shape data on the current Electronic CAM function (type A) was limited to a motion of the cam follower reciprocating (CAM). This time, the motion of CAM not reciprocating is possible too. T
Page 8002. Difference from the type A The type B (new type) is difference from the type A (old type) as follows. Therefore, matters which are not described following should be regarded as “same to the type A”. (1) The type A and the type B are switched by the parameter No.8081#2 (TYB). (2) In the type A, be
Page 801the cam shaft 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Example 2-2)Amount of a shift per one rotation of a cam shaft is 360 degree. In a cam shape data that a phase of 0 degree (start point) is not equal to a phase of 360 degree (end point), if the cam shape data is divided one rotation of cam shaft into 6 parts, [Type A] Imp
Page 8023750×(displacement of the end point [deg]) [deg/min] FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Electronic CAM Function (type B) Specifications B-63173EN-1/01-10 Edit. Date Signature Change 6/07
Page 8033. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8081 TYB [Data type] Bit axis TYB The Electronic CAM function is 0: Type A 1: Type B Note When this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off before the operation is continued. Related parameters (See the parameter manual for details.) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #
Page 804#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1008 RRLx ROAx [Data type] Bit axis ROAx The roll over function of a rotation axis is 0: Invalid 1: Valid RRLx Relative coordinates are 0: Not rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation 1: Rounded by the amount of the shift per one rotation Notes 1 Make the roll over
Page 805TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) TMN No 00/126E Date 22. Aug 2000 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i -MODEL H Enhancement of Electronic CAM Function Specifications 1. Communicate this report to : Ο Your information Ο GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Ο Machine
Page 806FANUC Power Mate i – Model H Enhancement of Electronic CAM Function Specifications 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B – 63173EN – 1/10 2. Summary of Change Group Name/Outline New,Add, Applicable Correct, Date Dele
Page 807This page is added to Contents. 23. Enhancement of Electronic CAM Function 1. OUTLINE................................................................................................................................................3 2. DETAIL EXPLANATION ...............................................
Page 808The following pages are newly added as “the section 23 Enhancement of Electronic CAM Function”. 1. Outline “Electronic CAM function” has been enhanced as follows. (1) Extension of maximum point number of CAM profile data In the conventional specification, the maximum point number of CAM profile data
Page 809(2),(3) can be applied to the application shown in the Fig.1-1. CAM follower position CAM shaft phase Starting external axis Stopping external axis Switch to imaginary axis External axis/ Stopping imaginary Imaginary axis axis Follower #1 Starting Stopping #1 #1 Follower #2 Starting Stopping #2 #2 S
Page 8102. Detail explanation Extension of maximum point number of CAM profile data • The maximum point number of CAM profile data depends on the tape storage length and the number of the follower axes as shown in Table 2-1. Please note that the tape storage length 160m or 320m is necessary. • It depends on
Page 811CAM follower links with or unlinks from CAM shaft on the fly The following improvement has been applied so that a CAM follower can join in or cut off synchronization with a CAM shaft on the fly. • Electronic CAM operation can be started without a CAM shaft phase calibration In the conventional speci
Page 812In case of start Suppose that the relation between the position of the CAM follower and the phase of the CAM shaft is shown in the following figure and the CAM follower points A, B, C correspond to the CAM shaft points P, P’, P”. Suppose that there is no delay to get the CAM shaft position to simpli
Page 813In case of stop Suppose that the relation between the position of the CAM follower and the phase of the CAM shaft is shown in the following figure and the CAM follower points A, B, C correspond to the CAM shaft points P, P’, P”. Suppose that there is no delay to get the CAM shaft position to simplif
Page 814Switch a CAM shaft from “external axis” to “imaginary axis” A CAM shaft can be switched from “external axis (external synchronization)” to “imaginary axis (internal synchronization)” during electronic CAM operation. It can be continued the CAM follower’s motion after the external axis will stop. CAM
Page 815Example How to use the items in chapter 2.2 and 2.3 concretely is described with the application example shown in the following figure. CAM follower position CAM shaft phase Starting external axis Stopping external axis Switch to imaginary axis External axis/ Stopping imaginary Imaginary axis axis F
Page 816Watching the position of a CAM shaft Use the position switch signal to watch the position of a CAM shaft. The position switch signal function watches the machine coordinate at every certain period and outputs the signal when the coordinate is in the area that is set by the parameters. Control the CA
Page 817Start external synchronization Start the external synchronization by the following way. 1 Set the parameter so that electronic CAM operation can be started without phase calibration. The parameter No.8082#1=1 2 Set the tolerance of the velocity difference of the CAM follower at start/stop synchroniz
Page 818Stop external axis (From external synchronization to internal synchronization) Stop the CAM shaft (external axis) by the following way and switch to the internal synchronization (imaginary axis). 1 Watch the position of the external axis. When the external axis comes to the designated point, stop th
Page 8193. Signals CAM follower selection signals ELCAM1 ELCAM4 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals select the CAM followers. They are provided for each CAM follower. The signal number corresponds to the CAM follower number. ELCAM 1…..the selection signal for the CAM follower 1 2…..
Page 820CAM shaft changing signal ECMCHG [Classification] Input signal [Function] Change from the external synchronization (electronic CAM operation with external axis as CAM shaft) to the internal synchronization (electronic CAM operation with imaginary axis as CAM shaft) while electronic CAM opera
Page 8214. Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8081 EXD [Data type] Bit type EXD In electronic CAM function, extension of maximum point number of the CAM shape data is 0: not applied. 1: applied. Notice When this parameter is changed, the tape storage memory must be deleted. Then, before this, it is necessar
Page 8228088 The number of points of the CAM shape data in electronic CAM function [Data type] Word [Data range] 3 ~ 2048 (In case that point number is not extended.) 3~14999 (In case that point number is extended.) Notice When this parameter is changed, the tape storage memory must be deleted. Then, before
Page 823TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) Ｎｏ．ＴＭＮ０１／023E Ｎｏ．ＴＭＮ０１／ Date 2001. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Display PMC screen on Handy operator’s panel 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ○ Machine to
Page 824１．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. Ｂ－６３１７３ＥＮ－１／０１ No./Version ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Display PMC screen on Handy operator’s Add. Immediate Function panel Optional Fun
Page 825Outline PMC screen can be displayed on the handy operator’s panel in Power Mate i-D/H. The specifications of the handy operator’s panel are almost the same as those of 9” CRT except the status screen of PMCDGN. Some screens are not supported in the handy operator’s panel. As for restrictions, please
Page 826PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G0000 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 G0001 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G0004 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 G0005 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 G0006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 G0007 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 G0008 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 G0009 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 > [SEARCH][ ][ ][ ][ ] Note.
Page 827 AB2 CDAEFG H CDAEFG H !"# $ $ % &&%' %%# $" & ( ) * +,# % * + #$ - #$ +. $& +''/''. * $" # 0 +&
Page 828ＦＡＮＵＣＰｏｗｅｒＭａｔｅ i －ＭＯＤＥＬＨ The function of increment system IS-C １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i- MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version Ｂ－６３１７３ＥＮ－１／０１２．Summary of Change Group Name／Outline New,Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic The function
Page 829Replace the description of " NOTE" in the chapter " 2.2.2 INCREMENT SYSTEM" as follows. NOTE The IS-A cannot be used in the Power Mate i - D Delete the description of "(Power Mate i – D only)" in the title of "Table 1.2.2(C)" in the chapter " 2.2.2 INCREMENT SYSTEM" Replace the description of " NOTE
Page 830Replace the description of the table of " (7) Skip-feed per minute" of the " 3 axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g" in the chapter " 15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION" as follows. [ Unit of data ] When bit 3(F10)of parameter No.8002 is set to 0 Data unit Unit IS-A,IS-B IS-C Linear Metric machine 1 0
Page 831Replace the description of the table of " (12) Continuous feed " of the " 3 axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g" in the chapter " 15 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION" as follows. IS-A,IS-B IS-C Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input Magnified 166458mm/min 1664.58inch/mi 16645mm/min 166.45inch
Page 832TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN 01 / 081 E Date 18/06/2001 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Caution for the signals that are not mentioned 1. Communicate this report to: ¤ Your information ¤ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ¤ Machine tool
Page 833F A N U C P o w e r M a t e i- M O D E L D / H Caution for the signals. that are not mentioned 1 . Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. B - 6 3 1 7 3 E N - 1 / 0 1 No./Version 2 . Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name/ Out
Page 834Caution The interface signals between the CNC and PMC (G000~, F000~) left blank in list of Addresses are reserved for future expansion. They must not be accessed. Power Mate i-MODEL D/H CONNECTION TITLE MANUAL(Function) Caution for the signals .that are not 01 010521 New design DRAW B-63173EN-1/01-2
Page 835TECHNICAL REPORT(MANUAL) NO.TMN01/093E Date General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL H THE LIMITATION OF PMC AXIS CONTROL IN THE MULTI PATH MODE Communicate this report to : Your information only GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Rob
Page 836FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL H THE LIMITATION OF PMC AXIS CONTROL IN THE MULTI PATH MODE Type of applied technical documents Name Power Mate i - MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 Summary of Change Group NameOutline New,Add, Applicable
Page 837Add the following description after the " NOTE " of the " alarm and message " in the chapter "15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL" The limitation in the multi path mode The function of multi path mode is realized with the operation of PMC axis control. When the parameter No.8003#7 for the multi path mode is set t
Page 838Only the following functions are available. Axis control command Operation (Hexadecimal code) 00h Rapid traverse (linear acceleration/deceleration) 01h Cutting feed – feed per minute (exponential acceleration /deceleration or linear acceleration/deceleration) 02h Cutting feed – feed per revolution(e
Page 839i The function of Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i- MODEL D/H MAINTENANCE MANUAL Spec. No./Version Summary of Change Group Name Outline New,Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic The function of DPL/MDI. ADD Immediate Function Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts N
Page 840NOTE When the DPL/MDI or DPL/MDI Package is connected, the keys on the CRT, PDP, LCD and handy operator's panels are disabled, and their screens are restricted to those for position display. Please add the following description as "1.1.2 DPL/MDI Panel" after the "1. DISPLAY AND OERATION". 1.1.2 DPL/
Page 841(1) Function keys Function keys indicate large items like chapters in a document. Indicates the current position. Conducts the following: In EDIT mode ...edits and displays the program in the memory In automatic operation ...displays command value. Used to display offset settings
Page 842(3) Caution on using the DPL/MDI If the DPL/MDI, CRT (PDP, LCD)/MDI, and handy operator's panel are connected at the same time, the DPL/MDI takes precedence. The CRT (PDP, LCD)/MDI and handy operator's panel are disabled, and their functions are restricted to position display. Please add the followi
Page 843Please change the description in “1.4.1 General” as follows. 1.4.1 Alarms generated in the Power Mate are recorded. The latest 50 alarms General generated are recorded. The 50th 50th and former alarms are deleted. Alarm history cannot be displayed on DPL/MDI or DPL/MDI operation Please change the de
Page 844Please change the title of 1.7.1 as follows. 1.7.1 Displaying of CRT/MDI Please add the following description as the "1.7.2 DISPLAYING of DPL/MDI” in the "1.7 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE". And shift the chapter number of after this chapter. 1.7.2 Displaying of DPL/MDI (1) Press the key
Page 845Please add the following description after “1.7.2 Contents Displayed (Common)”. DPL/MDI The system configuration screen and the state display etc. are not prepared on the DPL/MDI. Therefor, see the following diagnostic number. The following diagnostic number cannot be displayed on CRT/MDI or Handy o
Page 846Please add the following description to the last of “1.9 List of operation” (DPL/MDI) Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = 1 key Clear All memory clear Power ON - <7> AND <9> Parameter/offset clear O Power ON - Power Mate i –D: 1 path side of dual paths syst
Page 847Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = key 1 Search Program number search EDIT / PRGRM → Program number → < ↓ > AUTO Sequence number search AUTO PRGRM After program number search; → Sequence number → < ↓ > Address word search EDIT PRGRM Word to be searched for
Page 848Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = key 1 Output to Parameter output EDIT DGNOS / PARAM screen → external PARAM I/O All program output EDIT PRGRM → 9999 → One program output EDIT PRGRM → Program number → Pitch error compensation data
Page 849(Power Mate i-D2) D2) Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = 1 key Select path Select Single path control system Power ON - < S > AND < 2 > control to Dual paths control system system Select Dual paths control system Power ON - < S > AND < 1 > to Single path control s
Page 850Please add the following description just after “Setting procedure of parameters (CRT/MDI)” in the chapter “3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT”. DPL/MDI 1. Set emergency stop. 2. Press the key to display the settings screen. 3. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at PWE, then press
Page 851Add the following description just before “Explanations” in the chapter “3.2.2 Outputting parameters”. Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode. 2. Execute file heading when required. As for for the file that the parameter is output to, to, refer to Explanations (Output to a floppy). 3. Select the pa
Page 852Please add the following descriptions just after the chapter “3.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation”. Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select EDIT mode. 2. Execute file heading when required. 3. Select the Pitch Error Compensation data display screen by pressing key. 4. Press <
Page 853Please add the following description just after the chapter “3.2.7 Outputting Part Program”. Procedure (DPL/MDI) A program registered in memory can be punched using the procedure below. 1. Confirm parameter as like above 1. 2. Select EDIT mode. 3. Press to display the program screen. 4. Key
Page 854Please add the following descriptions just after the chapter “3.2.10 Inputting PMC Parameters”. Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Set the emergency stop state. 2. Press key several times and then select the SETTING screen. 3. Confirm that DWE=1. 4. Press key several times then selec selectt
Page 855Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1. Select the EDIT mode. 2. Display the data display screen by pressing key. 3. Press key. 4. The input offset data will be displayed on the screen after completion of input operation. Please add the following descriptions just after the chapter “3.2.14 Inputting Part
Page 856Please change the “4.3 PMC SCREEN” to “4.3 PMC SCREEN(OPERATION ON THE CRT/MDI) ” in the chapter “4.Interface Between NC and PMC”. Please add the following descriptions just after the chapter “4.3 PMC SCREEN”. 4.4 The DPL/MDI panel is used to set PMC system parameters and OPERATION ON create and exe
Page 857The screen configuration for the PMC programmer (DPL/MDI) function is as follows: PMC programmer menu Sequence program start and stop INPUT or READ PMC PRG MENU 1/4 LADDER RUN/STOP >RUN/STOP MONITOR(STOP) CAN or WRITE PMC editing menu Editing ladder mnemonics INPUT or READ INPUT or READ PMC PRG MENU
Page 8584.4.1 To operate the PMC programmer, set K17#1(PMC-SB5) K17#1(PMC-SB5) or Selecting the PMC K900#1=1 Programmer Menu (PMC-SB6) of the keep relay area for PMC parameters to 1, then press the key two times on the DPL/MDI (press the key further when the program screen is selected), thus
Page 859Selecting SYSTEM PARAM on the PMC programmer menu displays the 4.4.2 system parameter screen. If the sequence program is running, selecting Setting and this function automatically stops the program. Displaying System Parameters 1 . Display the PMC programmer menu. (SYSTEM PARAM) 2 . Display the SYST
Page 8604.4.3 Selecting EDIT on the PMC programmer menu displays the editing Editing Sequence menu. Program(EDIT) 1 . Display the PMC programmer menu. 2 . Display the EDIT item by pressing the < ↓ > or < ↑ > key. PMC PRG MENU 2/4 >EDIT 3 . Press the or key. The PMC editing menu appears. PMC E
Page 8615. Enter the password and press the key. NOTE The entered password is not displayed. (Echo back is not performed.) When the password is not correctly specified, the error message is displayed. FALSE PASSWORD At this time, the display returns to the release requirement of password by pressing
Page 8623. Relay search Entering
then < ↓ > searches for the relay including the entered address. ( Example) Example) < > ,<0>,<.>,<2>, < ↓ > N0105 AND X0000.2 4. Relay coil search Entering ,< ,
, then < ↓ > searches for the relay address number>, coil including the ent

Page 863personal-computer FAPT LADDER Ladder mnemonics editing (a) RD.NOT.STK RD.N.STK (b) TMR timer-number SUB 03 TMR P001 timer-number (c) DEC code-signal-address SUB 04 DEC (PRM) decode-instruction P001 code-signal-address P002 decode-instruction The above also applies when modifying the ladder mnemonics

Page 864( Example) Example) ,, N1234 AND R0123.4 Before insertion N1234 AND.STK After insertion NOTE If inserting the instruction causes the memory capacity to be exceeded, the key is ignored without inserting the instruction.. 4 Deleting the ladder program (a) Enter < - >,<9>,<9>,<

Page 8652. If the sequence program contains an error, the PMC editing menu is not displayed but an error message appears on the screen. (Example) Error message END FUNCTION MISSING 3. When parameter is multiple use error, the error message is displayed on the screen. (Example) Error message FUNC. PARAM NO.

Page 866NOTE When the sequence program cannot be started (RUN), the alarm of PMC occurred. Please confirm the alarm status referring to "4.4.10 Error List". 4.4.6 Displayed error message Error description (operator action) 1 COIL NOTHING No coil is specified for a functional Error Messages instruction using

Page 867Selecting I/O on the PMC programmer menu displays the screen 4.4.7 for storing the sequence program into F-ROM. F-ROM . Storing the Sequence 1. Display the PMC programmer menu. Program into Flash 2. Display the I/O item by pressing the < ↑ > or < ↓ > key. EEPROM (I/O) PMC PRG MENU 4/4 >I/O 3. Press

Page 868Error details The table below lists the details of the errors which may occur during storage into F-ROM using the DPL/MDI Error message Description PROGRAM DATA The ladder data in RAM is invalid. ERROR Alternatively, there is no RAM or ROM. SIZE ERROR The program exceeds the maximum size which can b

Page 869l Method of Outputting Ladder (1) Select "Diagnose screen" by key in key. (2) Key in key. (3) Key in key l Method of Outputting Outputting PMC-Parameter. (1) Key in key. (2) Key in key and optionally key in [File [File No.]. (3) Key in key. NO

Page 870ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR(PAROGRAM RAM) ER17 PROGRAM PARITY ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ERROR ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER ER25 SOFTWARE VERSTION ERROR (PMCAOPT) ER26 PMC CONTOROL MODULE ERROR(PMCAOPT) ER27 LADD

Page 871The on-line debugging function enables the monitoring and modification 4.5 of ladder programs and signal status on personal computer's screen On-line using a personal computer connected to the Power Mate through an RS- Debugging 232-C cable. Function FANUC FAPT LADDER-II is necessary to use the on-l

Page 872l Parameter in the Power Mate i (No.0024 (No.0024)) 0024 Port for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FAPT LADDER- II) [Date type] Byte This parameter sets the port to be used for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FAPT LADDER 2). 0: HSSB(COP7) 1: RS-232-C serial por

Page 873NOTE 1 The on-line monitor driver occupies the line while it is operating. In this state, other input/output functions cannot use the line. If other input/output functions use the line, it is necessary to display the above-mentioned parameter and stop the on-line monitor driver. 2 While the on-line

Page 874Please add the following description after “ Basic operation” in the appendix “C.2 SCREEN CONFIGURATION AND OPERATING PROCEDURE”. MAIN MENU screen SYSTEM MONITOR (DPL/MDI) 881I- 01 When the above BOOT SYSTEM screen is displayed, pressing the < ↓ > key on the DPL displays the following screens, in th

Page 875Please add the following descriptions after “ Operating procedure” in the appendix “C.2.1 System Data Loading Screen”. Operation Selecting SYSTEM DATA LOADING displays the file selection (DPL/MDI) screen, shown below. Pressing the < ↑ > or < ↓ > key on the DPL displays the names of the files in the

Page 876To end the operation, press the key once *END appears on the screen. The file information screen is displayed. Pressing the key also displays the file information screen. To return from the file information screen to the initial screen, press the key once *END appears on the sc

Page 877Please add the following descriptions after “Operating procedure” in the appendix “C.2.4 System Data Save Screen”. Selecting SYSTEM DATA SAVE displays the file selection screen, Operation shown below. (DPL/MDI) Pressing the < ↑ > or < ↓ > key on the DPL displays the names of the files in flash memor

Page 878During saving or restoration, the following screen is displayed: SRAM256A.FDB : The name of the file being saved or BACKUP restored is displayed and BACKUP blinks. Once saving or restoration has been completed, the selection screen is displayed again. To end the operation, press the key once

Page 879During formatting, the following screen is displayed: CARD FORMAT : EXEC blinks. EXEC Once formatting has been completed, the initial screen is displayed again. Please add the following descriptions after “ Operating procedure” in the appendix “C.2.8 Load Basic System Function Screen”. Selecting SYS

Page 880Please exchange the appendix “C.3 ERROR MESSAGE AND REQUIRED ACTIONS” with the following descriptions. C.3 ERROR MESSAGES AND REQUIRED ACTIONS The following table lists and explains error messages in alphabetical order. Message Description and required action ( ) is displayed data on DPL/MDI. B BOOT

Page 881Message Description and required action ( ) is displayed data on DPL/MDI. I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE. The selected file cannot be read into flash memory. The (ERROR-003) selected file or the header information for flash memory may have been damaged or destroyed. ILLEGAL FROM MODULE. The ID part of flash

Page 882Message Description and required action ( ) is displayed data on DPL/MDI. M MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check whether the HIT SELECT KEY. memory card is defective. (ERROR-018) MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Write to memory card is failed. Check whether the HIT SELECT KEY

Page 883FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H The function of DPL/MDI Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec. No./Version B-63174EN/01 Summary of Change Group Name Outline New,Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic The function of DPL/MDI. ADD Immediate F

Page 884FANUC Power Mate X DGNOS O N G G AXIS POS Y K/ X PARAM OPR FF M RD S NOT WRT T PRGRM Function key ALARM & @ H # / EOB VAR SUB OR AND STK No. Data input key P 7 8 9 I READ INSRT Q 4 5 6 J WRITE DELET Program edit key T/ R 1 2 3 K ALTER D/R Input key 0 -/+ CAN INPUT Cursor move key Fig. 1.1.2 DPL/MDI

Page 885Used to set and display parameter, diagnostic, and PMC parameter. Display of Alarm number and external message. (2) Keyboard functions Table 2.1.2 MDI Keyboard functions Key Functions Address/numerical key Press these keys to input alphabetic, numeric, and other characters. When an address o

Page 886Please add the following description before the "NOTE" of the "4.2 MDI OERATION ". Procedure for DPL/MDI Place the system in MDI mode and select the program screen. The following screen appears. > O0000 % The program number, "O0000", is automatically inserted. Create the program to be executed accor

Page 887Please add the following description as the "7.4 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PMC DATE IN DIAGNOSIS CREEN (DPL/MDI)” in the "7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS". 7.4 DISPLAYING AND SETTING PMC DATA IN DIAGNOSIS SCREEN (DPL/MDI) Displaying PMC data Procedure 1 Press the key to select the di

Page 888Changing the data format Procedure 1 Pressing the < . > key when PMC data is displayed changes the data format for display/setting. Each time the <. <. > key is pressed, the data format changes in the order: 1 byte of flag bits 1-byte decimal 2-byte decimal 4-byte decimal NOTE The size for the data

Page 8894 Press the < . > key to select a data format. >D0100 0 D0100 Example: Select 1-byte D0100 10 decimal. 5 Use the numeric keys to enter a value. >D0100 0 D0100 = 100_ 6 Press the key. The data value is input and displayed. >D0100 100 D0101 10 NOTE The range of values that can be entered in ea

Page 890Please add the following description before the "Explanations” in the " 8.2 File SEARCH" Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select EDIT or AUTO mode. 2 Push key to select the program screen. 3 Key in address N. 4 Key in a file number. 5 Press key. The following head searching occurs according to t

Page 891Please add the following description before the "Explanations" in the " 8.4.1 Inputting a Program Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. 3 Press < PRGRM > to display the program screen. 4 After entering address O, specify a program number to be ass

Page 892Please add the following description before the " Explanations (Output to a controller tape)" In the " 8.4.2 Outputting a Program". Procedure (DPL/MDI) (Program No.) : Punches out a specified program. -9999 : Punches out all programs. Please add the following description after

Page 893Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)” in the " 8.6.1 Inputting Parameters". 1 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side. Procedure (DPL/MDI) 2 Set PWE on the setting screen to 1. Alarm PS100 is displayed at this time. 3 The parameter screen is selected by pr

Page 894Please add the following description before the " Explanations" in the " 8.6.3 Inputting Pitch error compensation data". Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select the EDIT mode. 2 Select the Pitch error compensation data display screen by DGNOS/PARAM> key. 3 Press the > key. 4 Pitch er

Page 895Please add the following description before the " Explanations" in the " 8.7.2 Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables". Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select the EDIT mode. 2 Select the custom macro common variable display screen by pressing key. 3 Specify file heading when required. For which file t

Page 896Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Scan method " in the chapter " 9.1.1 Word Search". Procedure for DPL/MDI Scan is used per 1 word. (a) Press the cursor< ↓ > key N1234X100.0Y1250 M12 ; N5678M03; The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cursors

Page 897Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Procedure for searching an address" in the chapter " 9.1.1 Word Search". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1 Key in address M 2 Press cursor< ↓ > key and the search begins. When the Press search ends, M is displayed at the cursor. Pressin

Page 898Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Procedure for inserting a Word" in the chapter " 9.1.3 Inserting a Word". Procedure for DPL/MDI M15 to be inserted N1234X100.0Y1250 ;M12;N5678M03; To be searched for 1 Search for or scan the word immediately before the inserti

Page 899Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Example of changing M13 to M15" in the chapter " 9.1.4 Altering a Word". Procedure for DPL/MDI N1234X100.0Y1250;M13;S12; To be changed to M15 1 Search for/scan the word to be changed. 2 Key in the address to be modified. In th

Page 900Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Example of deleting a block of No.1234" in the chapter " 9.2.1 Deleting a Block". Procedure for DPL/MDI Current searched/scanned word(word indicated by the N1234 X100.0 Y1250 T13 ; S12; Area to be deleted Pressing the an

Page 901Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Procedure for program number search" in the chapter " 9.3 PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1. Select EDIT or AUTO mode. Method 1 2. Press the < PRGRM> PRGRM> key. key. 3. Key in address O 4. Key in a program No. t

Page 902Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Procedure for sequence number search " in the chapter " 9.4 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1. Set the mode select switch to AUTO. 2. Press > button. 3. Select the program number to which the seq

Page 903Please add the following description after the " Abbreviations of custom macro word " of the " Explanations " in the chapter " 9.7 EDITING OF CUSTOM MACROS ". Editing macro statements using DPL/MDI Switching the screen (a) To switch from the ordinary screen to the macro statement editing screen, pre

Page 904(c) Pressing the key inserts a blank at the cursor position. Example >=#101* 0 The blinking cursor is positioned to the ".". Pressing the key twice positions the cursor as follows: >=#101* .0 The blinking cursor is positioned to the blank. (d) Pressing an alphanumeric key inserts the

Page 905Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of "Procedure for background editing" in the chapter " 9.8 BACKGROUND EDITING ". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1. Display the background edit screen by pressing the key while pressing and holding the key. { } 2. Specify a pr

Page 906Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" in the chapter " 10.2 AUTOMATIC INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS ". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1 Set the setting parameter SEQ to 1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press key. 4 Key in address N. 5 Key in the initial value of N, e.g. 10. 6

Page 907After entering the address X, Y enter a numerical value and Press key, then the value entered is added to the machine position. This is used to correct the machine position through key entry. The coordinate value registered in this way will be an absolute coordinate value. Enter G90 (Absolut

Page 90813. N3 is registered in memory. 14. Position the tool at P2. 15. Enter address G and then 01. Press . Then enter address X and press . Enter address F and then 300 to register the third block, N3G01X-F300;, N3G01X-F300;, in memory. 16. N4 is registered in memory. Enter address M a

Page 909Please replace the " General" in the chapter " 11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA". General To operate a machine, various data must be set through the CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to display and set d

Page 910Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" in the chapter " 11.4.1 Setting and Displaying the Machine Offset Value". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1. Press the key to display the offset screen. 2. Use the cursor keys or enter <(number key)> to display the offset

Page 911Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" in the chapter " 11.4.5 Displaying and Setting Custom Macro Common Variables". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1. Press the key to display the custom macro variable screen. 2. Use the cursor keys or enter <(number key)> to

Page 912Please add the following description after the " Procedure (CRT/MDI)" of " Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing " in the chapter " 11.5.1Displaying and Setting Parameters". Procedure for DPL/MDI 1. Press the key to display the settings screen. 2. Use the cursor keys to position

Page 913Please add the following description after the " Procedure(CRT/MDI)" of " Warning for data setting or input/output operation" in the chapter " 11.6.2 Displaying the Status and Warning for Data Setting or Input/Output Operation". Contents of data for DPL/MDI The program edit status and data set statu

Page 914Please add the following description before the " WARNING" of " H, LIST OF OPERATION" in the chapter " APPENDIX" (DPL/MDI) Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = 1 key Clear All memory clear Power ON - <7> AND <9> Parameter/offset clear Power ON - Power Mate i

Page 915Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = 1 key Search Program number search EDTI / PRGRM → Program number → < ↓ > AUTO Sequence number search AUTO PRGRM After program number search; → Sequence number → <↓> Address word search EDIT PRGRM Word to be searched for →

Page 916Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = 1 key Output to Parameter output EDIT DGNOS / PARAM screen → external I/O PARAM All program output EDIT PRGRM → 9999 → One program output EDIT PRGRM → Program number → Pitch error compensation data

Page 917(Power Mate i-D2) D2) Classifi- Function KEY SETTING Mode Function Operation cation SW PWE = 1 key Select path Select Single path control system Power ON - < S > AND < 2 > control to Dual paths control system system Select Dual paths control system Power ON - < S > AND < 1 > to Single path control s

Page 918FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H The function of DPL/MDI Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 Summary of Change Group Name Outline New,Add, Appl

Page 919Please add the following description as "21 SCREEN STATE SIGNALS(OUTPUT) DPL0, DPL1 DPL2 " and "22 PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE FUNCTION(OUTPUT) " after the "20 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT". 21 SCREEN STATE SIGNALS(OUTPUT)DPL0.DPL1,DPL2 DPL/MDI and DPL/MDI Package screen state is output

Page 920Signal name key signal name key signal name key signal name key K0…… 0 KPRD… . KPOS… KN…… N POS &@ K1…… 1 KNO… KPRG… KG…… G No. PRGRM K2…… KSLH… KVAR… MENU KR…… R 2 / VAR K K3…… KEOB… KPRM… DG

Page 921Please add the following Signals in the "APPENDEX A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES". F0210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0 F0211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8 F0212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT F0213 KALM KWRT KVAR KPRG KPOS F0214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN F0217 KX KR KG KN KO F0218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF F0254 DPL2 DPL1 DPL

Page 922 DE7 FGDHIJ K; FGDHIJ K; i !" #$%#&!$' (! )!" * ! %!# ( + #&!$#! ,! -!#( ++' !("!# $ . / 01' ! +! / 0 '( 2 '( 0

Page 923FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H High-speed skip function (with traveling distance from skip signal) in PMC axis control FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) !"# B-63173EN-1/01 $ # % '( ) # &

Page 924The following explanation is added after 15.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL 15.1.1 High-speed skip function (' #. % #. % % # / % ) % ) in PMC axis control General In case high-speed skip function (with traveling distance from skip signal) in PMC axis control, if an extern

Page 925Format High-speed skip function (with traveling distance from skip signal) in PMC axis is specified by the PMC axis indirect command. As for detail of the PMC axis indirect command, refer to the section of the “1.10.9 PMC axis indirect command”. Format in the PMC axis indirect command Address which

Page 926[Valid data range] Data range IS– A IS –B IS –C Unit Linear Metric input 10 ~ 240000 1 ~ 240000 0.1 ~ 100000.0 mm/min axis Inch input 0. 1 ~ 9600.0 0.0 1 ~ 9600.00 0.001 ~ 4000.000 inch/min Rotation axis 10 ~ 240000 1 ~ 240000 0.1 ~ 100000.0 deg/min Caution 1. When “0” is specified, the CNC cannot m

Page 927• Traveling distance over the skip signal (4byte) These signals are used to specify, in binary format, the traveling distance over the skip signal. [Unit of data] IS– A IS – B IS – C Unit Metric input mm Degree input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] 0 ~ 9

Page 928In case the axis can not be decelerated and stopped within the specified traveling traveling distance from skip signal because the distance is too short One of the following actions are done when the movement can not be decelerated and stopped within the specified traveling distance from skip signal

Page 929Movement between the block with this command and the next block The in-position check and the accelerating/decelerating completion check between blocks are not done, when both this block and the next block have the cutting feed command and the next block is input to the buffer before starting decele

Page 930The valid area for skip signal In the block of this command, the valid area for skip signal is shown below. (a) In case the axis stops at the start point of the block with this command. Speed specified traveling distance from skip signal this command T T Time The valid area for skip signal Note 1. T

Page 931–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Signal address –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– High-Speed Skip Signal DI30 DI30DI37 [Classification] Input signal [Function] These signals interr

Page 932–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 [Data type] Bit typeSRE SLS SLS While the high-speed skip signals are input, the high-speed skip signals are : 0 : not available 1 : available Note The following parameters mus

Page 933#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8731 EPMC7 EPMC6 EPMC5 EPMC4 EPMC3 EPMC2 EPMC1 EPMC0 [Data type] Bit type EPMCn The signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is 0: used for high-speed skip function or measuring function by using high-speed skip signal 1: used for interrupt type PMC Note This parameter must be set to 0, whe

Page 9346240 compensation for high speed skip signal DI30 6241 compensation for high speed skip signal DI31 6242 compensation for high speed skip signal DI32 6243 compensation for high speed skip signal DI33 6244 compensation for high speed skip signal DI34 6245 compensation for high speed skip signal DI35

Page 935 CD4 EFCGHI <: EFCGHI <: i ! "# $% & %' () (# $% * ++# %$'%( ) , - ./# % +% - . #$ 0 #$ .!%$( .11211! - $'

Page 936FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Rate-feed function (High response function) FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) !"# B-63173EN-1/01 $ # % '( ) # & ##( * + Rate-feed

Page 937 “ ” “ ” Rate-feed function +# G135.2 IP___ _F____ ; . The velocity at the end point of this block is specified directly by the value

Page 938Note) 4. The value of feedrate override is read in when the block is read from program memory. (In other words, at the moment when the previous block starts executing) If override is changed after the above, new value is ignored. 5. Axes slow down and stop once between the block with rate feed and t

Page 939Caution) When operation is interrupted by single block function between the continuous blocks with G135.2 or stop condition by single block is released, the transition of velocity is as follows. (1) In case operation is interrupted by single block function - Axes are decelerated by the time constant

Page 940 DE5 FGDHIJ K> FGDHIJ K> i ! "## $!%"" ! &$" ! !# " ' ( !% ') '* "! + ##* !"%!' ) , - ./* ! #! - . *" 0 *" .

Page 941FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Motion command with acceleration/deceleration time constant (High response function) FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H PARAMETER MANUAL !"# B-63180EN/01 $ # % '( ) # & ##(

Page 942Add the following description Bell shape acc/dec time constant for high speed response function T 1642 (For G135.3) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0-512 Feedrate Time Q Q-T2 T2/2 T2/2 T2 T2 Note 1. The acceleration time specified by this parameter is fixed regardless fee

Page 943FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Motion command with acceleration/deceleration time constant (High response function) FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) !"# B-63173EN-1/01 $ # % '( ) # & #

Page 944 “ ” “ ” 1.8.1.10 G135.3 (Motion command with acceleration/deceleration time constant) Outline This function enables to specify the time constant of linear

Page 945Format G135.3 IP__ F__ Q__ R_ R__ _; IP__: In case absolute command mode, the absolute coordinate of the end point is specified. And in case incremental command mode, moving distance is specified. Only one axis command can be specified in one block. F__: Feedrate is specified (mm/min) Q__: Time cons

Page 946Note 1. Only one axis can be specified in the block of G135.3 2. G135.3 belongs to the group 01 G code. 3. An axis will stop once after this command. 4. Only feed per minute is allowed. - Accelerating/decelerating behavior in case override is except 100%. Even when feedrate override is not 100%, the

Page 947Bell shape acc/dec time constant for high speed response function T 1642 (For G135.3) [Data type] Word axis [Unit of data] ms [Valid data range] 0-512 Feedrate Time Q Q-T2 T2/2 T2/2 T2 T2 Fig. 1.8.1.10.5 Note 1. The acceleration time specified by this parameter is fixed regardless feedrate command.

Page 948 FG3 HIFJKL ; HIFJKL ; i !" #$%#&!$' (! ))' !("!# $ * + ,-' ! )! + , '( . '( ,/!(# ,00100/ + ("! '! % , # (

Page 949"#$%&!'()*+!,-.*!iC,/012!3 389:CL;**?@A.8(@ "#$%&!'()*+!,-.*!iC,/012!3 /'14#5/467!,#$%#2 !"# BCDEFGH1$IJK $ # % '( ) # & ##( * + 389:CL;**?@A.8(@

Page 950!5:*!>(MM()8@9!<*LA+8;.8(@!8L!-<<*.*+!HOP!,%25Q75#R1!7SQ'!(>!QQ!'4/R4#,,Q$RO ,%25Q75#R1!7SQ'!(>!QQ!'4/R4#,,Q$RO HO!D!389:CL;**?@A.8(@ 389:CL;**?@A.8(@ T! /@MU! >(+! .:*! '()*+ ,-.*!iC3!V ,-.*! C3!V R*@*+-M 5:*!L=8;!>?@A.8(@!A-@!W*!;*+>(+X*
Page 951HOOG!389:CL;**?@A.8(@T)8.:!.+-\*M >?@A.8(@T)8.:!.+-\*M8@9 .+-\*M8@9! 8@9!<8L.-@A*!>+(X!L=8;!L89@-MV <8L.-@A*!>+(X!L=8;!L89@-MV T! /@MU! >(+! .:*! '()*+ ,-.*!iC3!V ,-.*! C3!V R*@*+-M Q@! .:*! REF! WM(A=! L;*A8>U8@9! .:*! .+-\*M8@9! <8L.-@A*!! 4!! >+(X! L=8

Page 952Q@!A-L*!.:*!-c8L!A-@!@(.!W*!<*A*M*+-.*< Q@!A-L*!.:*!-c8L!A-@!@(.!W*!<*A*M*+-.*8*< <*A*M*+-.*8*8*+(X!L=8;!L89@-M!W*A-?L*!.:*!<8L.-@A*!8L!.((!L:(+. /@*!(>!.:*!

Page 953FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H High-speed skip function Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Name PARAMETER MANUAL Spec. No./Version B-63180EN/01 Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Function High-speed skip function Add. Optional

Page 954In the chapter "4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS", add or replace the e xplanations about parameters as follows. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE SLS [Data type] Bit type SLS While the high-speed skip signals are input, the high-speed skip signals are : 0 : not available 1 : available Note The following

Page 955#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 6203 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 6204 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 6205 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 6206 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 6270 5S8 5S

Page 956Multi–step skip function Command G31 G04 G31P1 G31P2 G31P3 G31P4 G31P5 G31P6 G31P7 G31P8 G04Q1 Input G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4 G04Q5 G04Q6 G04Q7 G04Q8 signal ~Q8 SKIP / DI30 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 5S1 6S1 7S1 8S1 DS1 SKIP2 / DI31 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 5S2 6S2 7S2 8S2 DS2 SKIP3 / DI32 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 5S3 6S3 7S3 8S

Page 957#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8732 UPEG7 UPEG6 UPEG5 UPEG4 UPEG3 UPEG2 UPEG1 UPEG0 [Data type] Bit type UPEGn The rising edge (0 --> 1) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is : 0 : not used for interrupt type PMC or high-speed skip signal. 1 : used for interrupt type PMC or high-speed skip signal. #7 #6 #5 #

Page 958FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H High-speed skip function Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Name CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Function High-speed skip function Ad

Page 959The following explanation is added after 14.2.2 Multi–step Skip 14.2.3 High-speed skip function ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- General The skip function can be performed by using a high-speed skip signal (DI30

Page 960Pnc : Position where an axis is actually stopped after detecting a skip signal. [mm/inch] P : Position to be measured [mm/inch] Q : Servo delay [mm/inch] Under the conditions shown above, the NC calculates the following equation according to the parameter SEA (bit 0 of parameter No. 6201) or the SEB

Page 961------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Signal ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- High-speed skip signal DI30 ~ DI37 [

Page 962------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE SLS [Data type] Bit type SLS While the high-speed skip signals are input, the high-speed skip signals are : 0 : not available 1 : avail

Page 963#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1 6270 5S8 5S7 5S6 5S5 5S4 5S3 5S2 5S1 6271 6S8 6S7 6S6 6S5 6S4 6S3 6S2 6S1 6272 7S8 7S7 7S6

Page 964Multi–step skip function Command G31 G04 G31P1 G31P2 G31P3 G31P4 G31P5 G31P6 G31P7 G31P8 G04Q1 Input G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4 G04Q5 G04Q6 G04Q7 G04Q8 ~Q8 signal SKIP / DI30 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 5S1 6S1 7S1 8S1 DS1 SKIP2 / DI31 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 5S2 6S2 7S2 8S2 DS2 SKIP3 / DI32 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 5S3 6S3 7S3 8S

Page 965#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8733 DWEG7 DWEG6 DWEG5 DWEG4 DWEG3 DWEG2 DWEG1 DWEG0 [Data type] Bit type DWEGn The falling edge (1 --> 0) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is 0 : not used for interrupt type PMC or high-speed skip signal 1 : used for interrupt type PMC or high-speed skip signal. 6240 compens

Page 96614.2.4 High-speed skip function ( with traveling traveling distance from skip signal) signal ) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- General In the G31 block specifying the traveling distance R from skip signal, if t

Page 967In case the axis can not be decelerated and stopped within the specified traveling traveling distance from skip signal because the distance is too short One of the following actions are done when the movement can not be decelerated and stopped within the specified traveling distance from skip signal

Page 968Movement between the block with this command and the next block The in-position check and the accelerating/decelerating completion check between blocks are not done, when both this block and the next block are commanded the cutting feed. But the next block is read after the skip signal is input. So,

Page 969The valid area for skip signal In the block of this command, the valid area for skip signal is shown below. (a) In case the axis stops at the start point of the block with this command. specified traveling Speed distance R from skip signal G31 block T T Time The valid area for skip signal Note 1. T

Page 970------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Signal ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- High-Speed Skip Signal DI30 ∼ DI37 DI30 < X1003#0

Page 971------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6200 SRE SLS [Data type] Bit type SLS While the high-speed skip signals are input, the high-speed skip signals are : 0 : not available 1 : avail

Page 972#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 6270 5S8 5S7 5S6 5S5 5S4 5S3 5S2 5S1 6271 6S8 6S7 6S6 6S5 6S4 6S3 6S2 6S1 6272 7S8 7S7 7S6 7S5 7S4 7S3 7S2 7S1 6273 8S8 8S7 8S6

Page 973Multi-step skip function Command G31 Input G31P1 G31P2 G31P3 G31P4 G31P5 G31P6 G31P7 G31P8 signal SKIP DI30 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 5S1 6S1 7S1 8S1 SKIP2 DI31 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 5S2 6S2 7S2 8S2 SKIP3 DI32 1S3 2S3 3S3 4S3 5S3 6S3 7S3 8S3 SKIP4 DI33 1S4 2S4 3S4 4S4 5S4 6S4 7S4 8S4 DI34 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 5S5 6S5 7S

Page 974#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8732 UPEG7 UPEG6 UPEG5 UPEG4 UPEG3 UPEG2 UPEG1 UPEG0 [Data type] Bit type UPEGn The rising edge (0 --> 1) of the signal DI3n (X1003 bit n) is : 0 : not used for interrupt type PMC or high-speed skip signal. 1 : used for interrupt type PMC or high-speed skip signal. #7 #6 #5 #

Page 975------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Caution Caution 1. The traveling distance R from skip signal is specified the distance that is traveled along a tangent, tangent, when two or more axes are specified in this bloc

Page 976TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) ) TMN01/173E Date . .2001 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Custom Macro in the high response mode 1. Communicate this report to: Your information GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Machine tool builder Sales agency End

Page 977FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Custom Macro in the high response mode Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Name CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. B-63173EN-1/01 No./Version Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Function Optional

Page 978Replace the following description in “ Execute program in the high response mode ” o f “ 22. High response function” function” . Before revision (9) Up to about 1000 blocks can be specified totally in all programs. After revision (9) Normally, up to about 1000 blocks can be specified totally in all

Page 979#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8706 APMCD [Data type] Bit APMCD In the system that the high response function is enabled, the variables from #1245 to #1995 in the normal mode are 0 : not available 1 : available Add the following error codes in “Compile error code list” of “ 22. High response function” func

Page 9800114 This error occurs when one of the following commands is specified. • The brackets (“[”and “]”) are not in pairs for the IF or WHILE statement. Example) IF [ #1000000 EQ 1 GOTO 1 ; • ‘GOTO’ is not specified for the IF statement. Example) IF [ #1000000 EQ 1] ; • ‘DO’ is not specified for the WHIL

Page 9811024 This error occurs when one of the following commands is specified. • The macro variable ‘#’ is specified for M code group number. Example) 50 P#1000000 ; • The macro variable ‘#’ is specified for the parameter of the M code output function. Example) 40 P#1000000 Q1 ; 1030 The macro sentence is

Page 982Add the following description after “ 22.2 Auxiliary f unction in high response mode” mode” . 22.3 Custom Macro in the high response mode When high speed response function is used, this function enables to use macro sentence and macro system variable in motion program. The following macro sentence c

Page 983Note) 1. The arithmetic commands except the above can not be used. 2. The f igures below the decimal place are omitted when the decimal part remains as a result of division. 3. “ - ” cannot be placed just before “ ABS” ABS” . Ex.) The command such as “ # i = -ABS[#j] - ABS[#j]”” is not permitted. 4.

Page 984Example) (1) If the specified conditional expression is satisfied (#i = #j), this program IF [#i EQ #j] GOTO n ; branches to the block with sequence (2) number n, and the processing2 is executed. Processing1 (1) (2) If the specified condition is not satisfied (#i #j), the processing1 is executed. Nn

Page 985Nesting 1 The identification numbers (1 to 3) can be used as many times as required. WHILE [.....] DO1 ; Processing END1 ; : WHILE [.....] DO1 ; Processing END1 ; 2 DO loops can be nested to a maximum depth of three levels. WHILE [.....] DO1 ; : WHILE [.....] DO2 ; : WHILE [.....] DO3 ; Processing E

Page 986Note 1. DO ranges cannot overlap. overlap. If the following program is specif specif ied, the compile error 0124 occurs when the compile is done. WHILE [.....] DO1 ; Processing WHILE [.....] DO ; END1 ; Processing END ; 2. Branches must not be made to a location within a loop. IF [.....] GOTO n ; :

Page 98722.3.2 Referr Referr ing to variables In order to refer to the value of a variable in a motion program, specify a word address followed by the variable number. The value of a macro variable can be referred just to specify the position, the distance or the feed rate. Example) G90 G00 X#i ; •••OK G91

Page 98822.3.5 System variables The following system variables are available in the motion program. Variable number Function #5021 ∼ #5028 Current position (Machine coordinate system) #5041 ∼ #5048 Current position (Workpiece coordinate system) #5061 ∼ #5068 Skip position (Workpiece coordinate system) #5101

Page 989Warning Incorrect data may be read if data being written by a ladder program is read by an NC program, or if data being written by an NC program is read by a ladder program. When data is exchanged between a ladder program and an NC program, read/write timing must be set carefully. Generally, in case

Page 99022.3.6 Number of blocks The total number of blocks that can be specified in all programs is extended up to about 6000 from 1000 in the system that this function is available. Note 1. The part program memory is also necessary to create the programs. Please select the proper part program storage lengt

Page 991Limitations Bracket nesting Brackets can be used to a depth of one level for every macro statement. The operation can not be specified between bracket ‘[’ and bracket ‘]’. Example) #j = #[#i ] •••OK #j = ABS[#i ] •••OK #j = #[#[#i]] •••NG #j = ABS[#[#i]] •••NG #j = #[#i+ 1] •••NG Brackets (‘[’ and ‘

Page 992Modal G code and F command The modal G code (group 01 and group 03) and F command must be specified in the axis moving block after the block of the sequence number, END statement and WHILE statement. The sequence number can be specified up to 1000 in a program. (Allowable sequence number : 0 ~ 89999

Page 993FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL H Custom Macro in the high response mode Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Name PARAMETER MANUAL Spec. B-63180EN/01 No./Version Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Function Optional Custom Macro

Page 994I n the chapter "4. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS", add the explanations about p arameters as follows. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8706 APMCD HMC [Data type] Bit HMC The macro statement in high response function is 0 : not available 1 : available APMCD In the system that the high speed response function is

Page 995FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Custom Macro in the high response mode Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec. B-63174EN/02 No./Version Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Function Optional Custom Macro

Page 996Replace the following description in “ Execute program in the high response mode ” o f “ 3. High response function” function” . Before revision (9) Up to about 1000 blocks can be specified totally in all programs. After revision (9) Normally, up to about 1000 blocks can be specified totally in all p

Page 9970113 This error occurs when one of the following commands is specified. • The macro variable ‘#’ is specified for G code. Example) G#1000000 • The macro variable ‘#’ is specified for M code. Example) M #1000000 • The macro variable ‘#’ is specified for the optional block skip number. Example) /#1 •

Page 9980126 The number for DO and END is not correct. Example)WHILE[ #1200000 EQ 1] DO4 ; END4 ; 0128 The illegal macro sequence number is specified. Example) GOTO 90000 ; N90000 ; 1011 The macro variable after P in the G31 block is specified. Example) G90 G31 P#1000000 X0 ; 1024 This error occurs when one

Page 999Add the following description after “ 3.2 Auxiliary f unction in high response mode” mode” . 3.3 Custom Macro in the high response mode When high speed response function is used, this function enables to use macro sentence and macro system variable in motion program. The following macro sentence can

Page 1000Note) 1. The arithmetic commands except the above can not be used. 2. The f igures below the decimal place are omitted when the decimal part remains as a result of division. 3. “ - ” cannot be placed just before “ ABS”ABS” . Ex.) The command such as “ # i = -ABS[#j] - ABS[#j]”” is not permitted. 4.

Page 1001Example) (1) If the specified conditional expression is satisfied (#i = #j), this program IF [#i EQ #j] GOTO n ; branches to the block with sequence (2) number n, and the processing2 is executed. Processing1 (1) (2) If the specified condition is not satisfied (#i #j), the processing1 is Nn executed.

Page 1002Nesting 1 The identification numbers (1 to 3) can be used as many times as required. WHILE [.....] DO1 ; Processing END1 ; : WHILE [.....] DO1 ; Processing END1 ; 2 DO loops can be nested to a maximum depth of three levels. WHILE [.....] DO1 ; : WHILE [.....] DO2 ; : WHILE [.....] DO3 ; Processing E

Page 1003Note 1. DO ranges cannot overlap. overlap. If the following program is specifspecif ied, the compile error 0124 occurs when the compile is done. WHILE [.....] DO1 ; Processing WHILE [.....] DO2 ; END1 ; Processing END2 ; 2. Branches must not be made to a location within a loop. IF [.....] GOTO n ; :

Page 10043.3.2 Referr Referr ing to variables In order to refer to the value of a variable in a motion program, specify a word address followed by the variable number. The value of a macro variable can be referred just to specify the position, the distance or the feed rate. Example) G90 G00 X#i ; •••OK G91 G

Page 10053.3.5 System variables The following system variables are available in the motion program. Variable number Function #5021 ∼ #5028 Current position (Machine coordinate system) #5041 ∼ #5048 Current position (Workpiece coordinate system) #5061 ∼ #5068 Skip position (Workpiece coordinate system) #5101

Page 1006Warning Incorrect data may be read if data being written by a ladder program is read by an NC program, or if data being written by an NC program is read by a ladder program. When data is exchanged between a ladder program and an NC program, read/write timing must be set carefully. Generally, in case

Page 10073.3.6 Number of blocks The total number of blocks that can be specified in all programs is extended up to about 6000 from 1000 in the system that this function is available. Note 1. The part program memory is also necessary to create the programs. Please select the proper part program storage length

Page 1008Limitations Bracket nesting Brackets can be used to a depth of one level for every macro statement. The operation can not be specified between bracket ‘[’ and bracket ‘]’. Example) #j = #[#i ] •••OK #j = ABS[#i] •••OK #j = #[#[#i]] •••NG #j = ABS[#[#i]] •••NG #j = #[#i+ 1] •••NG Brackets (‘[’ and ‘]

Page 1009Modal G code and F command The modal G code (group 01 and group 03) and F command must be specified in the axis moving block after the block of the sequence number, END statement and WHILE statement. The sequence number can be specified up to 1000 in a program. (Allowable sequence number : 0 ~ 89999

Page 1010TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) (MANUAL) TMN01/175E Date . .2001 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL H Direct signal output function ( High Response Function) 1. Communicate this report to: Your information GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Machine tool

Page 1011FANUC Power Mate i -MODEL H Direct signal output function (High response function) 1. Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H Connection manual (Function) Spec.No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 2. Summary of Change New,Add Name Outline Applicable Group Correct, Date Delete Ba

Page 1012The following error messages are added in the “Compile error code” in the chapter 1.8 “High speed response function”. No. Contents 1028 The incorrect “Q” is specified in the block of direct signal output. 1029 The address “Q” is not specified in the block of direct signal output. FANUC Power Mate i

Page 1013Add the following description after the chapter 1.8.2.2 “M99 in high speed response mode” mode” . 1.8.2.3 Direct signal output function in high response function In high response mode, the signals of the built-in I/O (Y1000-Y1002) can be controlled directly by the M-code command of CNC. • This funct

Page 1014Format As for on/off timing of signals, there are two types of controlling methods. One is immediate output type. Another type is output after pulse distribution end. Immediate output type In this type, regardless of the command of the previous block specified just before the block with the M-code f

Page 1015Example) When the following program is executed after compiling, the blocks with M40, M41 and M42 start executing even if the motion command just before these blocks is not finished. And the signals Y1000#0, #1 and #2 are turned on. Parameter No.7410=40 setting No.7415=1000 No.7420=3 O8000; G90G01X1

Page 1016Output after pulse distribution end type In this type, when the block with a motion command is specified just before the block with the M-code for direct signal output, the signal is output after the motion command is finished. The format is shown below. To turn on a signal Mm Pn Q3 ; m : the value

Page 1017Example) When the following program is executed after compiling, the signal Y1000#0, #1 and #2 are output after MFIN1 (G0458#0) correspond to M10 is returned. O8000; M10P1; M40P1Q3; M41P1Q3; M42P1Q3; % • The timing of direct signal output is varied according to the type of motion command specified b

Page 1018(2) In case an axis is not decelerated between two motion commands When M-code for direct signal output is specified after the block with “G01” and the next block is also the block with “G01”, the direct output signal is output after the pulse distribution of the previous block is finished. Example)

Page 1019Setting of M-code and output signal The M-code number and signal address for this M-code for direct signal output can be set by parameters. The address of output signal can be assigned by the parameter No.7415- 7417 (Output address 1-3 of M-code for direct signal output) corresponding to the paramet

Page 1020Example An axis is moved from A to B by way of C. A B C The signal Y1000.0 is turned on when The signal Y1000.1 is turned 1) the axis reaches near the point B. 2) on after the axis reaches the (Output after pulse distribution end point C. type) (Immediate output type) 3) 4) One program starts anothe

Page 1021Note • When a direct signal is turned on and also off within a program, the M- code group number (n: given by address P) of each command has to be the same value. When a turning-on-command and a turning-off- command are given in different programs respectively, each M-code group number has to be spe

Page 1022• In case that several blocks with M-code for direct signal output are specified consecutively between blocks without this command such as a motion command, empty block (only “;”) or so on, if both a-turning-on command and a turning-off-command for the same signal are specified, the latter command i

Page 1023Parameter Data no Data 7410 M-code 1 for direct signal output function 7411 M-code 2 for direct signal output function 7412 M-code 3 for direct signal output function (Data type): Word (Valid data range): The number of the M-code for direct signal output is specified. The M-code with special meaning

Page 1024Data no Data 7420 Number of output bits 1 for direct signal output 7421 Number of output bits 2 for direct signal output 7422 Number of output bits 3 for direct signal output (Data type): Byte (Valid data range): 1-8 Set the number of output bits on Y address. Ex) When the output address is Y1001 an

Page 1025Compile error The following description is related to the compile error added for direct signal output. As for the other compile error, please refer to the “Compile error code list” in the chapter 1.8 “High speed response function”. (1) Compile error 1029 is generated when the address “Q” is not spe

Page 1026Alarm, diagnosis In the following case, an alarm is generated and CNC comes to emergency stop state when the power is turned on. The cause is displayed in diagnostic data. (1) The edition of the PMC control software is not the one to support the function that allows CNC to access the Y address direc

Page 1027TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN 02/029E Date 22. March 2002 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H High Speed Position Switch specifications １．Communicate this report to : ○ Your information only ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder

Page 1028FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H High Speed Position Switch specifications １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i -MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change Group Name／Outline New, Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic Funct

Page 1029※ The following pages are newly added as “the section 1.2.10 High Speed Position Switch”. -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1. Outline When an axis is positioned within the range given by the m

Page 1030Built-in DO signals can be used up to 16 points for this position switch. Note This function is an optional function. In order to use “normal type high speed position switch” or “judging a passing direction type position switch” is used, the “high speed position switch” option is also necessary. The

Page 10312. Explanation Both “normal type” and “ judging a passing direction type” calculate the current position by the machine coordinate and the feedback of position detector at every 2msec, and check the condition whether a position switch signal should be turned on or not. The following selections are p

Page 1032Normal type high speed position switch In normal type high-speed position switch, when an axis is positioned within the specified range, the signal is output to the Y address of the built-in I/O. Normal type high-speed position switch Range to output signal n-th axis (current position) Axis assignme

Page 1033Judging a passing direction type high speed position switch In judging a passing direction type high-speed position switch, when an axis passes by a specified point (point A) in a specified direction, the signal in Y address of the built-in I/O is turned on. When an axis passes by another specified

Page 1034(Example) The outline of the action of judging a passing direction type high-speed position switch is shown in the following figure 1. （ａ） Current position Ｐ a e P1 (Point A) b d P2 (Point B) c (1) (2) (3) (4) （ｂ） Time ON Output signal OFF (1) (3) Time Set up condition • When an axis passes by the p

Page 1035In the figure 1, the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents the absolute coordinate of the high-speed position switch. The current position is moved from a to b, c, d and e with passing time. In this case, the high-speed position switch is turned on/off as shown in the figu

Page 1036---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3. Signal ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- High-speed Posit

Page 1037(Output condition) ・Normal type The signals are set to “1” in the following case: ・ when the current position of a controlled axis is within the specified range (Between the maximum value and the minimum value). The signals are set to “0” in the following case: ・when the current position of a contro

Page 1038The parameters to select the output conditions are summarized as below. ・In case normal type The relation between the address to output each high-speed position switch and the parameter is shown in the below table 1. High-speed Output Axis Output Maximum Minimum Valid position switch address assignm

Page 1039Reference point #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 establishment signal F120 ZRF8 ZRF7 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1 ZRF1-ZRF8 (Classification) Output signal (Function) Notify the system that the reference position has been established. A reference position established signal is provided for each axis. T

Page 1040---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4. Parameter No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1203 ZRC (Data type) Bit ZRC The specification of the reference point establishment signal (ZRF1-ZRF8) is changed. 0: Conv

Page 1041No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8500 E08 E07 E06 E05 E04 E03 E02 E01 8501 E16 E15 E14 E13 E12 E11 E10 E09 (Data type) Bit E01～E16 Set whether each high-speed position switch can be used or not. When the position switch is not used, the status of corresponding signal is always 0. The two-digit number par

Page 1042No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8508 A08 A07 A06 A05 A04 A03 A02 A01 8509 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A09 (Data type) Bit A01～A16 In judging a passing direction type, set the passing direction to turn on each high-speed position switch when each axis passes by the position given by the parameter No.8550

Page 1043No. 8516 Maximum point number of high-speed position switch (Data type) Byte (Valid data range): 1 to 16 Specify the maximum point number of high-speed position switch number to be used. Note) • The value set by this parameter is the total of the points of normal type and judging a passing direction

Page 1044No. 8517 Top output address of high-speed position switch (Data type) Word (Valid data range): 1000 to 1002 (within the range of Y address for built-in I/O) Specify the Y address to output the first to the eighth high-seed position switch signal. The output address of the ninth to the sixteenth high

Page 1045(Warning) 1. When the high-speed position switch is used in both paths of Power Mate i-D dual path control, the Y address for each path must be set different. Ex) In case 4 points are assigned to the first path and 4 points are assigned to the second path (Right setting) Parameter for the first path

Page 1046No. 8520 Axis number correspond to the first high speed position switch 8521 Axis number correspond to the second high speed position switch 8522 Axis number correspond to the third high speed position switch 8523 Axis number correspond to the fourth high speed position switch 8524 Axis number corre

Page 1047No. Maximum value of the range to output the first signal (in case of normal type) 8550 or point to turn on the first signal (in case of judging a passing direction type) Maximum value of the range to output the second signal (in case of normal type) 8551 or point to turn on the second signal (in ca

Page 1048(Data type): 2-word (Unit of data): Least input increment IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg (Valid data range): -99999999 to 99999999 ・Normal type Specify the maximum value of the range to output the h

Page 1049No. Minimum value of the range to output the first signal (in case of normal type) 8580 or point to turn off the first signal (in case of judging a passing direction type) Minimum value of the range to output the second signal (in case of normal type) 8581 or point to turn off the second signal (in

Page 1050(Data type) 2-word (Unit of data): Least input increment IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Millimeter machine 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 0.0001 deg (Valid data range): -99999999 to 99999999 ・Normal type Specify the minimum value of the range to output the hi

Page 1051---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5. Alarm and message Number. Message Content 5800 System combination The function to be executed is not effective mismatch because the combination of the system is

Page 1052---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6. Matters to pay attention 1. In normal type, if the range to output the signal is so small or an axis moves so fast that the high-speed position switch may not o

Page 10537. When the absolute position detector is used, the status of the high-speed position switch is not changed while the follow-up operation of the absolute position detector is being executed till the coordinate is established just after the power on, APC alarm or servo alarm status. (In this conditio

Page 1054TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02/037E Date 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H Enhancement of External I/O device control function 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ○ Machine tool b

Page 1055FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H Enhancement of External I/O device control function １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. B-63173EN/01 No./Version ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic

Page 1056Please replace the entire chapter 13.2 with the following description. FANUC Power Mate i -MODEL D/H TITLE Enhancement of External I/O device control function DRAW B-63173EN/01-32 EDIT DATE DISIGNE APPROV. DESCRIPTION SHEET 2/40 FANUC LTD

Page 105713.2 External I/O device control ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Outline The data exchanging with other device can be commanded by the PMC signal. This function is activated as an operation in b

Page 1058Note) The specification of “External I/O Device Control” is enhanced to treat a memory card. With this enhancement, the specification of “the output file name” and “Channel selection signal” is also changed to more general. There are two types of controlling ways in “External I/O Device Control”. On

Page 1059(1) Registering/ collating/ (a) Registering/collating part program outputting ① Turn the program selection signal “EPRG” to “1” and turn the other program selection signals to “0”. ② Specify an input channel by the following way. [In case of the enhanced way] Specify an input channel by the external

Page 1060(b) Outputting part program ① Turn the program selection signal “EPRG” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Specify an input channel by the following way. [In case of the enhanced way] Specify an output channel by the external I/O device control channel selection signal, “EXIO1 and

Page 1061(2) Inputting/ Be sure to select the enhanced way by setting the parameter outputting No.8761#0(EIB)=1. parameters (a) Inputting parameters ① Turn the parameter selection signal “EPARM” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Set the setting parameter “PWE”(Parameter write enable) to “

Page 1062(3) Inputting/ outputting Be sure to select the enhanced way by setting the parameter macro variables No.8761#0(EIB)=1. (a) Inputting macro variables ① Turn the macro variable selection signal “EVAR” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Specify an input channel by the external I/O d

Page 1063(b) Outputting macro variables ① Turn the macro variable selection signal “EVAR” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Set the parameter No.0000#1 (ISO) to “1” and the parameter 6001#2 (VFP) to “1”. ③ Specify an input channel by the external I/O device control channel selection signa

Page 1064(4) Outputting diagnosis data Be sure to select the enhanced way by setting the parameter No.8761#0(EIB)=1. ① Turn the diagnosis data selection signal “EDGN” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Specify an input channel by the external I/O device control channel selection signal, “E

Page 1065(5) Inputting/ outputting Be sure to select the enhanced way by setting the parameter PMC data No.8761#0(EIB)=1. (a) Inputting PMC data ① Turn the PMC data selection signal “EPMC” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Specify an input channel by the external I/O device control channe

Page 1066(b) Outputting PMC data ① Turn the PMC data selection signal “EPMC” to “1” and turn the other selection signals to “0”. ② Specify an input channel by the external I/O device control channel selection signal, “EXIO1 and EXIO2”. When RS-232-C is selected, set the value 0 or 1 to the parameter No.20. S

Page 1067Format of input/output Each data is output in the following each format. data When each data is input, the format of each data must be made in accordance with the following format. Format of parameter data N Parameter number A1 P Data A2 P Data..... ; N: Give parameter number by a value followed aft

Page 1068Format of diagnosis data N Data number P Data ; N: Give data number by a value after N as follows ・In case the parameter No.8761#0(EIB)=0 (the former way) (when Data input/output via I/O Link is selected) Data number=Diagnosis number+20000 ・In case the parameter No.8761#0(EIB)=1 (the enhanced way) (

Page 1069Format of PMC data N Data number P Data ; N: Give data number by a value after N. Data number is the sum of address number and the value assigned for each address. Data number＝the value assigned for each address＋Address number P: Give data by a value followed after P (8-digit binary number) The valu

Page 1070Summary of the former way and the enhanced way Major difference between two ways are the following 5 points. 1. Whether each data can be input/output through memory card slot or not 2. Whether data input/output through RS-232-C is only program or not 3. Whether a file name can be specified or not, w

Page 1071file that is selected on a Handy-File is input and the file specified here is not input. FANUC Power Mate i -MODEL D/H TITLE Enhancement of External I/O device control function DRAW B-63173EN/01-32 EDIT DATE DISIGNE APPROV. DESCRIPTION SHEET 17/40 FANUC LTD

Page 1072Relation between “I/O device external control I/O” and “Data input/output via I/O Link” The following chart shows the relation between “I/O device external control I/O” and “Data input/output via I/O Link”. Former way (Parameter No.8761#0=0) Slave Master Power Mate i-D/H Power Mate i-D/H FANUC I/O L

Page 1073The feature of “Data input/output via I/O Link” functions are as follows. ① Data input/output via I/O Link (Master) This function is executed when an operator operates a soft-key. ② Data input/output via I/O Link - B (Master) In this function, “Data input/output via I/O Link (Master)” is controlled

Page 1074----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Signal ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- External Read Sta

Page 1075(c) Via I/O Link on the master side In case “Data input/output function via I/O Link – B (Master)”: the parameter No.8761#0=0, IOLS=1 ・ Start registration/collation of program or input of macro variable/ parameter/diagnosis data (PMC) of the slave from the slave device to the program storage

Page 1076----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- External Punch Start Signal (Classification) Input signal EXWT (Function) Data are output by “External I/O device control”, “Data < G058#3 > input/output via I/O

Page 1077The selection of input/registration data depends on the program number that is specified by the PMC functional instruction, “WINDW” command. Note) ・While data are punching, “Read/punch busy signal (RPBSY)” is turned to “1”. ・ External punch start signal (EXWT) is ignored, while background editing op

Page 1078----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- External I/O Device Control (Classification) Input signal Channel Selection (Function) Specify input channel as the following table, when the parameter Signal No.

Page 1079The “****” part in the above table is replaced with the decimal number that is converted from the binary data given by the External I/O Device Control File Name Selection Signal. Ex.: In case that EPRG is turned on FLN15-FLN08=00100110 FLN07-FLN00=10010100 When punch operation is executed in the abo

Page 1080----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- PMC Data Selection Signal (Classification) Input signal EPMC (Function) When this signal becomes logical "1", the CNC operates as < G251#3 > follows: Select PMC d

Page 1081----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Program Selection Signal (Classification) Input signal EPRG (Function) When this signal becomes logical "1", the CNC operates as < G251#4 > follows: Select progra

Page 1082----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Macro Variable Selection Signal (Classification) Input signal EVAR (Function) When this signal becomes logical "1", the CNC operates as < G251#5 > follows: Select

Page 1083----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Diagnosis Data Selection Signal (Classification) Input signal EDGN (Function) When this signal becomes logical "1", the CNC operates as < G251#7 > follows: Select

Page 1084----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- External Punch Start Data (Classification) Input signal Number Signal (Function) Specify the value according to the start number of each data in EDG00-EDG15 16 bi

Page 1085----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- External Punch Total Data Number Signal (Classification) Input signal EDN00-EDN15 (Function) Specify the total data number to be output in 16 bit binary, when < G

Page 1086----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- External Read/Punch (Classification) Output signal Alarm Signal (Function) This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred RPALM during input/output op

Page 1087----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Background Editing Signal (Classification) Output signal BGEACT (Function) This signal indicates that the background edit function is < F053#4 > operating. When t

Page 1088----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD G248 EXIO2 EXIO1 G249 FLN07 FLN06 FLN05 FLN04 FLN03 FLN02 FLN01 FLN00 G250 FLN15 FLN14 FLN13 FLN12 FLN

Page 1089----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 0000 ISO Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Bit ISO Code used for data output 0: EIA code 1: ISO code 0020 I/O CHANNEL : S

Page 1090#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL [Data type] Bit RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control 0: The new program is registered, following the program already registered. 1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that

Page 1091#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3202 NE9 NE8 [Data type] Bit NE8 Editing of subprogram with program numbers 8000 to 8999 0: Not inhibited 1: Inhibited The following edit operations are disable: (1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with program numbers 8000 to 8999

Page 1092#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3290 KEY [Data type] Bit KEY For memory protection keys: 0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used. 1: Only the KEY1 signal is used. Note) The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or KEY=1. When KEY=0: ・KEY1: Enables a tool offset value and a work-piece z

Page 1093#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6001 VFP [Data type] Bit VFP Change the output tape format of macro common variables. 0: Common variable is output in custom macro sentence format. 1: Common variable is output in the format similar to Power Mate-A,B,C,E Note) The feature of each format is as follows: [In cas

Page 1094#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8761 EIB [Data type] Bit EIB External I/O Device Control Function is: 0: the former way. 1: the enhanced way. Note) Set this bit to 0, when “Data input/output function via I/O Link (Master)” or “Data input/output function via I/O Link (Slave)” is applied. FANUC Power Mate i -

Page 1095----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Alarm and message Number Message Description In memory or program collation, a program in 079 BP/S alarm memory does not coincide with that read from an external

Page 1096TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02/051E Date: 21, May, 2002 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/ H Addition of cautions for Servo Off １．Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder S

Page 1097FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/ H Addition of cautions for Servo Off １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change Group Name／Outline New, Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic Addition of

Page 1098Add the following descriptions to the “CAUTION” in the chapter “1.2.8 Servo Off”. 3. When an axis is placed in Servo-Off state during cycle start under the setting of enabling follow up (*FLWU=0) and machine is moved by external force, the amount of this moving cannot be reflected to the coo

Page 10994. When an axis is placed in Servo-Off state during cycle start under the setting of disabling follow up (*FLWU=1) and machine moved by external force, the amount of the moving is pulled back at a time at Servo-On. So the machine path is not shifted after this. The amount moved by external f

Page 1100TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02 / 049E Date 16, May, 2002 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H Addition of custom macro interface signal １．Communicate this report to : ○ Your information only ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder

Page 1101FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H Addition of custom macro interface signal １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN -1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Correct, Applicable Group Name／Outline Date Delete Addition of

Page 1102Replace the “Signal” of “11.3.1 Custom macro” with the following description Custom macro input signal UI000～UI031 ＜G054～G057＞ UI100～UI131 ＜G276～G279＞ UI200～UI231 ＜G280～G283＞ UI300～UI331 ＜G284～G287＞［classificiation］input signal ［function］No function is provided for the control unit. These signals c

Page 1103Custom macro output signal UO001～UO015 ＜F054, F055＞ UO101～UO131 ＜F056～F059＞ UO016～UO031 ＜F276, F277＞ UO200～UO231 ＜F280～F283＞ UO300～UO331 ＜F284～F287＞［classification］output signal ［function］No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a custom macro as a type

Page 1104The systtem valiables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as on the right side. The value assigned to the system valiable used on the left side last is used for the value of the system valiable to be assigned on the right side. Note）When a paramter No.6001#0(MIF) is set 1

Page 1105F054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000 F055 UO015 UO014 UO013 UO012 UO011 UO010 UO009 UO008 F056 UO107 UO106 UO105 UO104 UO103 UO102 UO101 UO100 F057 UO115 UO114 UO113 UO112 UO111 UO110 UO109 UO108 F058 UO123 UO122 UO121 UO120 UO119 UO118 UO117 UO116 F059 UO131 UO130 UO129 UO128 UO127

Page 1106Add the following description to the “Parameter” of “11.3.1 Custom macro” Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6001 MIF ［Data type］: Bit MIF A number of the system valiable of the interface signal in custom macro is 0: not extended Input signal : 1 bit type(#1000 to #1015), 16bit type(#1032) Output sig

Page 1107Replace the address part in “A.1 List of Address” with the following list PMC→CNC G056 UI023 UI022 UI021 UI020 UI019 UI018 UI017 UI016 G057 UI031 UI030 UI029 UI028 UI027 UI026 UI025 UI024 G0276 UI107 UI106 UI105 UI104 UI103 UI102 UI101 UI100 G0277 UI115 UI114 UI113 UI112 UI111 UI110 UI109 UI108 G027

Page 1108CNC→PMC F276 UO023 UO022 UO021 UO020 UO019 UO018 UO017 UO016 F277 UO031 UO030 UO029 UO028 UO027 UO026 UO025 UO024 F280 UO207 UO206 UO205 UO204 UO203 UO202 UO201 UO200 F281 UO215 UO214 UO213 UO212 UO211 UO210 UO209 UO208 F282 UO223 UO222 UO221 UO220 UO219 UO218 UO217 UO216 F283 UO231 UO230 UO229 UO22

Page 1109Add the following list to “A.2.1 Signal Summary(in the order of functions) of “A.2 Signal summary” Function Signal name Symbol Address PMi-D PMi-H Section Custom macro Input signal for custom UI016～UI031 G56,G57 ○ ○ 11.3.1 macro UI100～UI131 G276～G279 ○ ○ UI200～UI231 G280～G283 ○ ○ UI300～UI331 G284～G2

Page 1110TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN02/047E Date 2002.05.15 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D Improvement of the rigid tapping function １．Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder Sa

Page 1111FANUC Power Mate i－MODEL D Improvement of the rigid tapping function 1. Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i- MODEL D/H Name CONNECTING MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. B-63173EN-1/01 No./Version ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete The feed-forward

Page 1112Please add the following explanation to the top of the explanation in the chapter “9.5.6 parameter” of “9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1602 G8S [Data type] Bit G8S The look-ahead control for the serial spindle is 0 : Not effective. (It is not possible to use the look-ahead control

Page 1113Please add the following explanation to the next part of the explanation of the parameter number 5201 in the “9.5.6 parameter” of “9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5203 RFF [Data type] Bit RFF The meaning is as follows 0 : The feed-forward control and the fine acceleration/decelerat

Page 1114Please add the following explanation to the next part of the explanation of the parameter number 5301 in the “9.5.6 parameter” of “9.SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION. 5308 Width of in-position at R-point of tapping axis in rigid tapping [Data type] Word [Unit of data] Detection unit [Valid data range] 0 to 32

Page 1115FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/ H Trouble Diagnosis １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL （FUNCTION） Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change Group Name／Outline New, Add, Applicable Correct, Date Delete Basic Function Optional Trouble Di

Page 1116Add the following description after the chapter “2.13 Servo position deviation monitor signal” 2.14 Trouble forecast signal Outline When thermal simulation of servo axis exceeds trouble forecast level, Trouble forecast signal TDSMLx (F298.0 - F298.7) is output. A parameter TRSx (No.8853) need to be

Page 1117No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 8854 FIN8 FIN7 FIN6 FIN5 FIN4 FIN3 FIN2 FIN1 Data type: bit FIN1 – FIN8 Trouble forecast of disturbance torque of servo axis is: 0:Not available. 1:Available. No. 8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation Data type: WORD AXIS Data unit: % Data Range: 0 - 100% 8861 Troubl

Page 1118Replace the address part “A.1 List of Address” with the following list #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1 F299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1 Add the following list to “A.2.1 Signal Summary(in the order of functions) of “A.2

Page 1119TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN02/063E Date: 21. June 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL H Sub program call for high-speed response function 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool builde

Page 1120FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL H Sub program call for high-speed response function １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H Name CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Fu

Page 1121Add the following description to “22. High-speed response function”. 22.4 Sub-program call for high-speed response function 22.4.1 Outline In case of high-speed response function, fixed sequence or repetitive patterns in motion program can be registered in the CNC memory as sub-programs beforehand.

Page 1122・Sub-program call Sub-program can be called by specifying M98 and a sub-program number P. Optional block skip function can be applied to the block with M98 (sub-program call). Example) 1. In case a sub-program is called: M98 Ppppp ; Sub-program number Repeating number can not be specified. Use “WHIL

Page 1123・Return form a sub-program If M99 is executed in a sub-program, control returns to the program that calls this sub-program. Then the block next to M98 is executed. In high-speed response mode, sub-program return with return block command (M99 Ppppp) can not be specified. M99 must be commanded alone.

Page 1124Restriction ・Execution of plural programs simultaneously In high-speed response mode, plural programs can be executed at a time. But, when the same axis or M-code with the same M-code group number is specified in plural programs executed at the same time, an alarm 1001 occurs. When sub-program call

Page 1125It is not permitted to call a sub-program with the same program number from two or more programs at a time. If a sub-program is called from two or more program at a time, an alarm 1021 occurs. Example) Path 1 Main-program Command axis (X, Y) (1) M98P___ (4) Sub-program Command axis (A) (2) M98P___ P

Page 1126Note. The following period is regarded as a sub-program is under execution. (1) Start execution of sub-program Immediately after the block just before the block with M98 is started execution in the program that call a sub-program. (2) End execution of sub-program When all axis command and M-code com

Page 1127Note 1. In case you compile main programs and sub-programs at a time, a compile error 1824 occurs when those all program numbers are included in the area forbidden editing/displaying that is designated by the following parameters. Parameter Program forbidden editing/ displaying No.3202#0(NE8) =1 O80

Page 1128Add the following description to “Parameter” in the section “22. High speed response function”. 8691 Top number of sub-program number [Data type] 2-word [Valid data range] 1 to 9999 In case program number O4 digits 1 to 99999999 In case program number O8 digits But 8000 to 8031 assigned to main prog

Page 1129If NE8=1 and P8E=1, a compile error 1824 occurs at compiling. ・In case sub-program numbers are within 90000000 to 99999999. If NE8=1 and P9E=1, a compile error 1824 occurs at compiling. In case you start to compile only one program by an external signal, a compile error 1824 occurs if the program is

Page 1130Add the following to ”Compile error code list” in the section 22. High-speed response function” ・Compile error code list The following table shows the error code that occurs when the programs that call a sub-program are compiled. Note) When a compile error occurs, a cursor is moved to the part that

Page 1131Add the following table to “The alarm number at the diagnosis data No.896” in the section 22. High speed response function”. ・The alarm number at the diagnosis data No.896 Number Contents 0077 Sub-program call error (A sub-program is called over 5 nests) 0078 Program number that is called as a sub-p

Page 1132TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN 02/064E Date: 21. June 2002 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Skip function for High-speed response function １．Communicate this report to : ○ Your information only ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool buil

Page 1133FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL H Skip function for High-speed response function １．Type of applied technical documents Name FANUC Power Mate i -MODEL D/H CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Correct, Applicable Group Name／Outline Date Delete Basic Func

Page 1134※ The section 22.1.5 “G31 (Torque limit skip)” of the High response function are replaced by the following pages. 22.1.5 G31 (Skip function) Format G31 P__ IP__ F__; Explanation While the block with G31 and P command is executing, this block can be interrupted and skipped the rest of block by a sign

Page 1135・Relation between P command and skip signal In case of “no P command”, “P1 to P4”, “P101 to P104” By setting parameters (No.6202 to 6205), you can select which of four skip signals, SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4, is effective. Any relation between each P command and each skip signal can be selected. Moreover

Page 1136CAUTION Be sure to give the torque limit command before executing a skip command by torque limit. NOTE 1 Do not give the P command with the value out of range. If give, compile error is generated. If P command is omitted, it is regarded that “P1” is given. 2 A custom macro variable can not be applie

Page 1137Signals Skip signal SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4 [Classification] Input signal or [Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, , the position where a skip signal turns to “1” in SKIPP1 to SKIPP16 a command program block containing “G31P_”
Page 1138NOTE 1 The skip signal width requires at least 6msec. 2 The CNC directly reads the skip signal, SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4, from the machine tool; the PMC is no longer required to process the signal. 3 If the skip function is not used, the PMC can use the signal terminal, SKIP, SKIP2 to SKIP4, correspondi

Page 1139Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6202 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1 6203 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 6204 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1 6205 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1 [Data type] Bit type 1S1～1S4, 2S1～2S4, 3S1～3S4, 4S1～4S4 Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31P_) is issued with the skip function. The following table show

Page 1140#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8680 HSKZ SSRT TSRT [Data type] Bit type TSRT When a skip command block with G31 P98 or P101 to P126 is skipped by torque limit condition, 0: Servo following error and error of acceleration/deceleration are reflected to skip position. 1: Servo following error and error of acc

Page 1141Caution CAUTION 1 Disable feedrate override and automatic acceleration/ deceleration during moving axis by skip command to improve the precision of the tool position when skip signal is input. (if No.6200#7 SKF = 1, then effective) 2 When automatic acceleration/deceleration is effective (the paramet

Page 1142TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO.TMN 02/095 E Date 22,Nov,2002 General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Pole Position Detection Function １．Communicate this report to : ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder Sales a

Page 1143FANUC Power Mate i－MODEL D/H Pole Position Detection Function 1. Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec.No./Version B-63173EN-1 /01 2. Summary of Change New, Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Function Pole

Page 1144Add the following description the item of “21 Pole Position Detection Function” to the next of the item of “20 External Pulse Input” FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Title Pole Position Detection Function Draw No. B-63173EN-1/01-41 Edit Date Design Description Sheet 2/2 Date Desig. Apprv.

Page 114521 Pole Position Detection Function FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Title Pole Position Detection Function Draw No. B-63173EN-1/01-41 Edit Date Design Description Sheet 3/3 Date Desig. Apprv.

Page 1146Overview When the pole position of a servo motor and the phase of its position detector is not adjusted, the torque of the servo motor cannot be controlled normally irrespective of a kind of motor, such as a rotation motor or a linear motor. This function measures a lag of phase and can adjust it to

Page 1147・ When the incremental encoder is used too with No.2229#0(ABSEN)=1, the result of pole positon detection is memorized to No.2139 (AMR offset) after the pole position detection is completed and one rotation signal in encoder is caught. This suppresses change of the torque constant by the variation in

Page 1148Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2213 OCM [Data Type] Bit axis OCM 0:Pole position detection is ineffective. 1:Pole position detection is effective. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 2229 ABSEN [Data Type] Bit axis ABSEN 0:AMR offset (No.2139) isn’t available. 1:AMR offset is available. Note ・ This parameter

Page 11492139 AMR offset [Data Type] Word axis [Data unit] degree [Valid data range] 0 to 360 [Standard setting] 0 In case of No.2229#0=1, the result of pole position detection is memorized to this parameter, which is the electrical angle. CAUTION After the pole position was detected, never change this value

Page 1150Signal Pole position detection request signal RPREQ1-RPREQ8 [Classification] Input signal [Function] Request to execute the pole position detection. A number appended to a signal represents the controlled axis number. [Operation] CNC starts the pole position detection by turning to “1”. Once

Page 1151Note ・ In case of the application of absolute encoder, the parameter No.2229#0 is set to “1” and the pole position detection is executed once, after the pole position detection is completed, this signal can keep the condition of “1” even if the power is turned off and on. If the parameter No.2139 is

Page 1152Replace the following list to list of the same addresses of the item of ”A.1.1 Power Mate i-MODEL D/H List Of Addresses” PMC→CNC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G135 RPREQ8 RPREQ7 RPREQ6 RPREQ5 RPREQ4 RPREQ3 RPREQ2 RPREQ1 CNC→PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F158 RPDET8 RPDET7 RPDET6 RPDET5 RPDET4 RPDET3 RPDET2

Page 1153TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) Ｎｏ．ＴＭＮ０３／0012E Date February 2003. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H The function of feedrate override and feedrate override cancel for each axis group in the PMC axis control 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc

Page 1154FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H The function of feedrate override and feedrate override cancel for each axis group in the PMC axis control １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H Name CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add

Page 1155Replace the description of item 24 and 25 in the chapter “15.1 PMC axis control” as follows. Signal list No. Symbol Signal name *FVOE to *FV7E Feed rate override signals 24 *FVOEg to *FV7Eg OVCE Override cancellation signal 25 OVCEg Signal Detail 24 Feedrate override signals *FV0E to *FV7E(Note 1) *

Page 115625 Override cancellation signal OVCE(Note 2) OVCEg [Classification] Input signal [Function] When the override signal for PMC axis control is enabled independently of the CNC axis control by setting bit 2(OVE) of parameter No.8001, the cutting feed override is fixed to 100% by setting this signal to

Page 1157Add the following description to “Signal address” in the chapter “15.1 PMC axis control”. Signal address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G150 OVCE G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E G162 OVCEB G163 *FV7EB *FV6EB *FV5EB *FV4EB *FV3EB *FV2EB *FV1EB *FV0EB G174 OVCEC G175 *FV7EC *FV6EC *FV5EC

Page 1158Add the following description to “parameter” in the chapter “15.1 PMC axis control”. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8009 INOV IOVC [Data type] Bit type IOVC Signal for override cancel used in the PMC axis control 0 : is common signal for all group 1 : is each signal for each group INOV Signal for feedrate

Page 1159TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) Ｎｏ．ＴＭＮ０3/013E Date Feb. 2003. General Manager of Software Laboratory FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H Display of parameter set supporting screen function 1. Communicate this report to: ○ Your information ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool builde

Page 1160FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H The parameter set supporting screen function １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H Name CONNECTION MANUAL(FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic The p

Page 1161Add the following descriptions as “12.1.13 Display of parameter set supporting screen function”. 12.1.13 Display of parameter set supporting screen function In the parameter set supporting screen, the CNC parameters General necessary for the system start-up are grouped, and the relating parameters a

Page 1162FANUC Power Mate i – MODEL D/H Status display for PMC axis control １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Power Mate i –MODEL D/H Name CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) Spec. No./Version B-63173EN-1/01 ２．Summary of Change New,Add Applicable Group Name／Outline Correct, Date Delete Basic Status displa

Page 1163Add the description as "15.1.4 Status display for PMC axis control " 15.1.4 Status display for PMC axis control General The buffer status of PMC axis control and the axis status for PMC axis control can be displayed on CRT. Specification 1. Press function key SYSTEM 2. Press the continuous menu key

Page 1164Display items · ALARM SIGNAL The status of the alarm signal EIALg is displayed. · RESET SIGNAL The status of the reset signal ECLRg is displayed. · AXIS MOVE SIGNAL The status of the axis moving signal EGENg is displayed. · ECKZ SIGNAL The status of the following zero checking signal ECKZg is displa

Page 11653. Press the PAGE key when above screen is displayed. Input buffer, waiting buffer and executing buffer screen are displayed. PAGE Signal status ↓ Executing buffer screen screen ↑ PAGE PAGE ↑ ↑ PAGE ↓ PAGE PAGE ↓ ↑ Input buffer PAGE Waiting buffer screen screen PAGE ↓ FANUC Power Mate i - MODEL D/H

Page 1166(1) Display the executing buffer (command value) for PMC axis control PMC AXIS CONTROL O0001 N00001 (EXEC BUFFER) X AXIS Y AXIS COMMAND/SUB CMD 1/--- 34/ 8 FEEDRATE SIGNAL 5535 68 DATA SIGNAL 10000 120 SUB CMD DATA1(4) --- 1 SUB CMD DATA2(4) --- 250 SUB CMD DATA3(4) --- 10000 SUB CMD DATA4(4) --- 15

Page 1167(2) Display the waiting buffer (command value) for PMC axis control PMC AXIS CONTROL O0001 N00001 (WAITING BUF) X AXIS Y AXIS COMMAND/SUB CMD 1/--- 34/ 8 FEEDRATE SIGNAL 5535 68 DATA SIGNAL 10000 120 SUB CMD DATA1(4) --- 1 SUB CMD DATA2(4) --- 250 SUB CMD DATA3(4) --- 10000 SUB CMD DATA4(4) --- 150

Page 1168(3) Display the input buffer (command value) for PMC axis control PMC AXIS CONTROL O0001 N00001 (INPUT BUF) X AXIS Y AXIS COMMAND/SUB CMD 1/--- 34/ 8 FEEDRATE SIGNAL 5535 68 DATA SIGNAL 10000 120 SUB CMD DATA1(4) --- 1 SUB CMD DATA2(4) --- 250 SUB CMD DATA3(4) --- 10000 SUB CMD DATA4(4) --- 150 SUB

Page 1169Note 1. When command is not set in each buffer, data is not displayed. ( " ---" is displayed. ) 2. When command is not indirect command, the data of SUB CMD and SUB CMD DATA are not displayed. (" ---" is displayed. ) 3. In sub-command data area, every 4 byte data from top address is displayed. 4. Fo

Page 1170TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN99/037E Date, 1999 General Manager of S o f t wa r e L a b o r a t o r y FANUC Power Mate i–Model D/H D e v e l o p m e n t o f P o we r M a t e i s e r i e s ( S t e p 2 ) ( S u p p l e m e n t ) 1. Communicate this report to: O Yo u r i n f o r m a t i o n O GE Fanu

Page 1171Add tables of contents to the technical report No.TMN99/007E "FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series (STEP 2)" which was published before. Insert B-63173EN-1/01-5(the 2nd edition) as a table of contents into the technical report No.TMN99/007E B-63173EN-1/01-5 "FANUC Power Ma

Page 1172FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series （STEP 2）） CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) （CONTENTS））・Multiple M commands in a single block 2 ・Waiting function 9 ・Feed rate change function 15 ・Rigid tapping using a chaser 18 ・Addition of the description about bell-shaped acc/dec in P

Page 1173FANUC Power Mate i-MODEL D/H Development of Power Mate i series （STEP 2）） OPERATOR'S MANUAL （CONTENTS））・Multiple M commands in a single block 2 ・Rigid tapping using a chaser 4 ・Rate feed 7 ・Addition of the description about selection of the figures of program numbers (4 figures /8 figures) 9 ・Add